JOHNA.SEAVERNS 


TUFTS   UNIVERSITY   LIBRARIES 


nil  Hill  mil  I 
014 


nil  mil  mil 
550  764 


WbMbt  FarT%  Library  of  Veterinary  Medteto 

Cummings  School  of  Veterinary 

Tufts  University 

200  Westboro  Road 

North  Qfaflon.  MA  01530 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE 


A    CONCISE    TREATISE 

AS  TO    ITS 

QUALITIES  AND   SOUNDNESS 

Including  Bits  and  Bitting — Saddles  and  Saddling — Stable 

Drainage — Driving  One  Horse,  a  Pair,  Four-in-hand, 

or  Tandem ;  and  extracts  from  RAREY'S  and 

ROCKWELL'S  Method  of  Training 

Young  and  Obstinate  Horses 

BY 

Captain  F.  W.  BACH 


WITH   30  ILIiUSTBATIONS 


NEW  YORK 

WILLIAM   R.   JENKINS 

VETERINARY  PUBLISHER  AND  BOOKSELLER 

851  AND  853  Sixth  Avenue 


^ 
^ 


Copyright,  1893,   By  William  R.  Jenkins. 
All  IligMs  Reserved, 


Pbinted  by  the 

Peess  of  William  R.  Jenkins 

New  Yobk 


CONTENTS 


PAGE. 

Preface 

Introduction 5 

The  Skeleton 8 

The  column  of  the  Vertebrae — The  Spinal  column 
— The  Neck — The  function  of  the  Hind  legs — The 
function  of  the  Fore  legs—  Comparative  value  of  the 
different  Bones  and  Joints. 

The  angular  combinations  of  the  Bones 10 

The  position  of  the  Hind  legs 13 

The  position  of  the  Fore  legs 19 

The  proportions  of  the  Fore  and  Hind  legs 24 

The  examination  of  the  Horse  from  front  anc"  from  behind      27 

Suggestions  to  the  purchaser  of  a  Horse 54 

Description  of  the  most  common  Blemishes  on  the  Legs . .      69 
*'  "         "  '*  '•    on  the  Fore  Legs      69 

"  «'         "  *•'  "    on  the  Hind  Legs      74 

The  Age  of  the  Horse 78 

Rarey's  and  Rockwell's  Methods  of  Training  Young 

or  Obstinate  Horses 81 

Introduction  —  False  views  of  the  habit  of  horses 
to  smell  at  unaccustomed  objects  —Funda- 
mental Rules  of  Rarey's  system  —  Application 
of  Rarey's  principles  for  wild  and  shy  Horses — 
Rarey's  method  of  training  obstinate  Horses — The 
handling  of  untrained  Horses — Putting  the  halter  on 
the  Colt — To  train  the  Colt  to  go  at  the  side  of  a 
trained  horse— To  tie  the  young  horse  without  its 
pulling  at  the  halter — Bridle  pulling — Putting  on 
the  Bit— To  get  the  Colt  used  to  the  bit— The  Bitting 
bridle  —  Bitting  the  Colt  —  Saddling  the  Horse  — 
Mounting  the  Horse — Riding  the  Horse,  after  Rarey 
—Riding   the  Horse,  after    Rockwell— Breaking 


ii  CONTENTS. 

Rarey's  and  Rockwell's  Methods,  etc.,  Continued, 

THE  Horse  to  Harness  —  Harnessing  the  Horse — 
Hitching  up  the  Colt — Teaching  the  Colt  to  back — 
Refusing  to  pull — To  drive  wild  Horses,  or  such  of 
vicious  habits — To  teach  the  Horse  to  lie  down — 
Throwing  the  Horse — To  teach  the  Horse  to  follow 
his  master —To  cause  the  Horse  to  follow  you — To 
teach  the  Horse  to  stand  still  without  tying— Bad  to 
bridle — Hard  to  back— Hard  pullers — Shoeing  the 
Colt  — Striking  and  kicking  while  shoeing. 

Bits  and  Bitting 131 

Three  dimensions  of  the  Horse's  mouth.  (1)  The 
transversal  width  of  the  mouth.  (2)  The  width 
of  the  tongue-channel.  (3)  The  height  of  the  bars. 
The  width  of  the  Port— Length  of  upper  and 
lower  branch  of  the  bit — The  bit  stands  stiff,  or  falls 
through— Structure  and  size  of  the  Horse's  bars  and 
tongue— Movable  mouthpieces— Tongue  over  the 
bit— Grabbing  at  and  holding  the  bit— Combination 
bit. 

Saddles  and  Saddling 158 

The  AVooden-tree  Saddle— The  Elastic  Leather-tree 
Saddle — Ladies'  Saddles — Saddle  Cloths—  Girths — 
Stirrups— How  to  saddle  Horses  properly — Construc- 
tion of  the  Horse's  shoulder,  and  its  influence  on 
saddling — Where  to  place  the  Girths— Stirrups. 

Stable  Drainage 159 

Driving 161 

Driving  one  Horse  or  a  pair — Guiding  hand — 
Assisting  hand — Hints — Punishment  (where  to  hit) 
— Position  of  the  coachman  on  the  box — Starting — 
Stopping — Backing — Turning. 

Driving  four  in  hand — How  to  arrange  the  reins 
— To  start  correctly— Stopping— Backing— Turning 
— Going  down-liill — Going  up-hill — Another  way  to 
arrange  the  reins. 

Tandem  driving. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Frontispiece 

FIG.  PAGE. 

\-a 29 

1,2 35 

3,4 38 

5     39 

6,7 41 

8     43 

9,  10 44 

10-a 52 

11  Blemishes  of  the  fore  legs. 70 

12  Blemishes  of  the  hind  legs 75 

13  Teeth  of  the  Horse 78 

14  Skeleton  of  the  Horse 80 

15  Pulling  at  the  halter 94 

16  Bitting  bridle 97 

17  Rockwell  bit 99 

18  Rockwell  bridle 100 

19  Strap  with  buckle  and  wooden  gag  bit 116 

20,  20a,  21,  21a  To  teach  a  Horse' to  lie  down,  (Rarey).  . .  117 

22  Throwing  a  Horse,  (Rockwell) 120 

23  (The  right  and  the  wrong  way).    Bitting  the  horse 135 

24  Combination  bit o 138 

25a  New  adjustable  saddle  girth 148 

25  About  stable  floors 157 

26  Holding  the  lines  in  driving  one  horse  or  a  pair 161 

27  Position  of  the  coachman  on  the  box  . .   164 

28  Turning 107 

29  Holding  the  Lines  driving  Four  in  hand .  173 

30  Holding  the  Lines  driving  Four  in  Hand  (another  way)  178 


PEEF  ACE. 


Every  purchaser  of  a  horse  knows  by  expe- 
rience liow  difficult  it  is  to  arrive  at  correct  con- 
clusions as  to  its  soundness  and  qualities^  and  if 
he  is  dependent  upon  the  opinions  of  others, 
however  good  the  horse  may  prove  to  be,  his 
pleasure  is  marred  somewhat  by  the  thought 
that  it  was  not  he  himself  who  selected  the 
horse. 

Everybody  loves  a  horse ;  everybody  ought 
to  study  its  conformation.  To  facilitate  matters, 
generally,  it  is  the  intention  of  the  author  of 
this  little  treatise,  to  assist  the  intending  pur- 
chaser of  a  horse  by  laying  down  some  rules 
concerning  the  judging  of  horses. 

Unlike  many  valuable  books  on  the  exterior 
of  the  horse,  this  little  treatise  has  the  advantage 
of  great  conciseness  in  pointing  out,  in  few  pages, 
the  most  important  guiding  points  for  the  judg- 
ing of  a  horse,  omitting  a  detailed  description 
of  the  different  ailments  and  their  treatment. 


PEEFACE. 


Some  points  on  Rareifg  and  EochwelVs 
methods  of  training  young  or  obstinate  horses 
are  added,  as  it  may  become  necessary  for  the 
owner  of  horses,  especially  if  living  in  the 
country,  with  nobody  near  capable  of  hand- 
ling young  or  obstinate  horses,  to  break-in  his 
young  stock  himself  or  correct  those  having 
formed  bad  or  dangerous  habits. 

A  few  remarks,  concerning  how  to  handle  the 
reins  jDroperly  for  correct  and  stylish  driving 
one  horse,  a  pair,  a  four-in-hand,  and  a  tandem 
may  be  of  interest  to  some  of  the  readers.  Also 
bits  and  bitting,  saddles  and  saddling,  and 
stable  drainage,  will  be  considered. 

The  Authok. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Horse-breeding  in  the  United  States,  having, 
thanks  to  the  efforts  of  public-spirited  men,  reached 
such  dimensions,  and  been  raised  to  a  high  stand- 
ard of  excellence,  our  breeders  can,  most  favorably, 
compete  with  those  of  any  other  nation.  Still,  the 
vast  expanse  of  our  country  renders  it  in  many  cases 
impossible  for  the  buyer  to  purchase  directly  from 
the  breeder.  He  is,  therefore,  compelled  to  address 
himself  to  the  dealer,  who,  like  every  merchant,  will 
select  his  goods  to  secure  quick  sales,  especially 
because  they  are  really  an  eating  capital,  and 
perhaps,  more  than  any  other,  exposed  to  damage. 
The  appearance  of  the  damaged  and  the  used-up, — 
some  visible  defect, — is  far  more  in  the  way  of  a 
quick  sale  than  inferior  quality,  and,  therefore,  is 
studiously  avoided  by  the  dealer.  He  will  take  good 
care  to  produce  his  goods  to  the  best  advantage  to 
himself. 

The  fine  appearance  of  the  horse,  that  is,  the  good 
condition  and  the  smooth  hair,  is  brought  about  by 
rich  and  soft  feed,  a  warm  stable,  careful  covering, 
and  goud  grooming.     The   whip  takes  care  of  the 


6  INTRODUCTIOlt. 

liveliness  of  tlie  liorse  and  tlie  appearance  of  courage 
and  strength.  It  makes  the  horse  forget  all  stable 
vices,  as  gripping,  weaving,  kicking  and  biting; 
and  in  mustering,  causes  it  to  exert  every  nerve,  and 
oftentimes  to  step  as  it  may  never  step  again. 

The  dealer  will  take  care  that  no  blemishes  are  on 
the  bones  by  dealing  only  in  young  horses,  having 
done  as  yet  no  hard  work,  and  where  hereditary 
inclinations  have  not  been  brought  to  light  by 
exertion,  nor  such  defects  developed  which  are  a 
necessary  consequence  of  faulty  conformation.  It  is, 
therefore,  very  rare  to  find  a  good  matured  horse  in  a 
dealer's  stable.  Whoever  has  one  will  take  good 
care  to  keep  it,  or  else  he  will  get  a  higher  price  for 
it  amongst  his  friends  than  from  a  dealer,  who  is 
compelled  to  produce  such  horses  on  which  even 
the  would-be  connoisseur  can  find  no  fault.  Only 
large  dealers,  whose  customers  are  real  connoisseurs, 
buy  elderly  horses  for  good  prices  and  need  not  care 
for  harmless  blemishes.  The  pretending  connoisseur 
knows  nothing  but  to  find  blemishes,  sees  everywhere 
spavins  and  galls,  instead  of  judging  the  qualities  of 
a  horse  according  to  its  whole  framework. 

How  often  can  we  see  such  people  turning 
in  disgust  from  an  eight-year  Hercules  and  pay  a 
high  price  for  a  four-year  old,  clean-legged  weak- 
ling,   which,  after  the  first    exacting  use,  may  be 


INTEODUCTION.  7 

covered  with  quite  more  serious  defects  than  with 
that  little  gall,  which  held  them  back  from  the  pur- 
chase of  the  other  horse. 

The  desire,  though  unjustified,  to  buy  only  young 
horses,  may  have  its  origin  partly  in  that  the  age  of 
a  horse  by  its  teeth  can  only  be  judged  with  accuracy 
up  to  its  eighth  year,  and,  therefore,  the  purchaser 
is  afraid  to  buy  a  Methusalah,  and  partly  in  the 
mistaken  belief  that  every  step  the  horse  has  taken 
in  his  life  be  a  consummation  to  be  subtracted  from 
its  value.  But,  in  reality,  the  properly  conducted 
work,  instead  of  causing  deterioration,  is  a  necessity 
for  the  development  and  strengthening  of  the  horse's 
powers.  The  whole  appearance  of  the  animal  tells 
better  than  its  teeth  whether  it  is  in  its  decline,  and 
as  in  the  human  race  there  are  young  weaklings  in 
horses. 

The  judging  of  the  abilities  of  the  horse  accord- 
ing to  its  proportions  and  the  position  of  its  legs 
shall  form  the  nucleus  of  this  treatise. 


CHAPTEE  I. 

THE   SKELETON. 

The  horse  is  useful  to  man  by  its  motion.  The 
faster,  safer  and  lasting  the  same,  and  the  less  the 
soundness  of  the  legs  is  suffering  from  it,  the  more 
perfect  it  will  be.  The  motion  of  the  horse  varies 
with  the  difference  in  the  gait.  In  lualking  it  moves 
forward  with  one  hind  leg  assisted  by  the  diagonal 
fore  leg,  whilst  the  other  hind  and  fore  leg  support 
the  body.  This  movement  is  executed  in  a  slow 
manner,  in  four  beats,  without  free  propulsion. 
"When  trotting,  the  motion  is  in  two  beats,  spring- 
like. Two  diagonal  legs  support  the  body  while 
the  other  two  move  forward.  A  moment  before  they 
foot,  the  first  two  leave  the  ground  and  move 
forward  and  so  on.  In  gallop,  both  hind  legs  throw 
the  body  forward,  almost  simultaneously,  and 
move  it  in  a  rocking  motion  over  the  still 
supporting  fore  legs.  These  latter  are  lifted  the 
next  moment,  so  that  the  whole  body  floats  in 
the  air  for  an  instant.     The  hind  legs  reach  the 


THE   SKELETON.  9 

ground  first  again,  and  support  the  body ;  quickly, 
follow  the  fore  legs,  and  then  the  hind  legs  begin 
anew  their  forward  throwing  activity.  The  gallop 
is  discernible  to  the  ear  by  two  or  three  beats. 

If  we  consider  the  different  parts  participating  in 
the  movements  of  the  horse,  we  find  that  there  are 
the  neck,  the  back,  the  hind  legs,  and  the  fore  legs. 

The  column  of  the  vertebrce  extends  from  the  head 
to  the  tail.  The  part  from  the  withers  to  the  highest 
point  of  the  croup  is  destined  to  carry  the  whole 
rump,  and  its  power  is  augmented  partly  by  elonga- 
tions of  the  vertebrae  in  an  upward  direction,  partly 
by  the  ribs  fastened  to  the  vertebrae  on  both  sides 
and  forming  an  arch-like  vault  under  the  spinal 
column. 

The  spinal  column  consists  of  a  uniform  number  of 
vertebrae  (See  Skeleton  Fig.  14) ;  the  closer  they 
stand  together  the  shorter  the  column  will  be, 
and  accordingly  more  able  to  carry  weight. 
The  otherwise  horizontal  line  of  the  spinal 
column  sinks  downward  at  its  forward  termi- 
nation to  connect  with  the  vertebrae  of  the  neck, 
forming  the  so-called  curve  of  the  tuithers,  and  the 
more  pronounced  this  curve  the  greater  the  carrying 
power.  This  carrying  power  is  also  dependent  upon 
the  relative  positions  of  the  two  end  points,  or  in 
other  words  upon  the  distance  between  the  withers, 


10  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 

where  the  shoulders  are  fastened,  and  the  highest 
point  of  the  croup,  for  the  same  reason  that  the 
carrying  power  of  a  horizontal  pole  is  greater  the 
shorter  it  is.  The  back  must  appear  higher  in  its 
fore  part  (at  the  withers)  than  in  its  hind  part  if  the 
weight  of  the  rump  shall  be  equally  divided  between 
fore  and  hind  legs,  because  the  extensions  of  the 
vertebrae  are  considerably  larger  over  the  withers, 
not  only  so  much  as  is  necessary  to  that  projection, 
but  also  to  balance  the  ^foresaid  depression  of  the 
spinal  curve.  The  higher  and  longer  the  withers 
the  better.  From  the  point  where  the  latter  con- 
nects with  the  back,  the  upper  line  should  proceed 
horizontally.  Under  such  conditions  the  passive 
carrying  power  of  the  back  is  not  only  a  great  one, 
but  also  the  bulk  of  the  muscles  located  on  both 
sides  of  the  high  projections  of  the  spinal  column 
increase  the  power  of  gathering  on  the  hind  legs,  or, 
in  other  words,  the  active  carrying  power. 

A  deviation  from  this  formation  we  find  in  the 
overbuilt  horse,  where  the  line  of  the  back  mounts 
upward  from  the  end  point  of  the  low  withers.  In 
this  case  the  forward  end  of  the  spinal  column  rests 
on  supports  lower  than  those  of  the  rear  end,  the 
weight  being  consequently  thrown  more  on  the  fore 
legs.  This  fault  will  be  neutralised  only  when  an 
oblique  shoulder  and  a  high  set-up  neck  facilitate 


THE  SKELETON.  11 

an  increased  freedom  of  action.  As  these  latter 
qualities  are  more  frequently  found  with  mares  than 
with  horses,  the  disadvantage  of  the  former  beiug 
generally  overbuilt  is  of  less  consequence. 

If,  on  the  other  side,  the  fore  legs  stand  higher 
than  the  hind  legs,  the  horizontal  line  of  the  back 
will  be  lost  to  the  disadvantage  of  the  hind  legs. 

The  spinal  column  will  curve  upward  in  all  cases 
where  both  fore  and  hind  legs  are  placed  under  the 
body,  whilst  the  farther  the  horse  extends  its  fore 
and  hind  legs,  the  deeper  the  back  will  sink  down- 
ward, therefore,  a  horse  at  full  speed  will  at  one 
moment  curve  up  its  back  and  at  the  next  moment 
unbend  it  again.  For  this  reason  must  every  faulty 
construction  of  the  spinal  column,  deviating  from  the 
horizontal — the  supports  being  equally  high — dimin- 
ish the  ability  of  the  horse  to  curve  up  or  bend 
down  its  back.  A  back  between  equally  high  sup- 
ports, but  curved  up  by  nature,  is  called  a  liuncli  or 
roach  hack.  It  will  not  admit  the  bending  down 
under  the  horizontal  line,  therefore  disabling  horses 
of  this  kind  to  cover  much  ground  in  sharp  gaits. 
But  we  must  not  mistake  the  hunch  back  for  the 
bent-up  back.  Horses  of  a  powerful  short  back  and 
high  swelling  loins  are  oftentimes  found  to  bend  up 
their  back  under  the  rider  and  to  unbend  it  only 
after  prolonged  work,       -^" 


12  HOW   TO   JUDGE  A   HORSE. 

The  contrary  fault  is  the  deep,  and,  in  a  higher  de- 
gree, the  swayhack.  Horses  of  this  structure  lack 
the  power  of  curving  up  the  back.  If  a  long  back 
is  added  to  this  deficiency,  then  it  is  an  unmistak- 
able sign  of  weakness,  and  the  horse  is  not  fit  to 
carry  heavy  weight.  In  such  a  back  the  deepest 
point  is  generally  in  the  centre.  Horses  of  a  short 
but  deep  back  have  the  lowest  point  frequently  right 
behind  the  shoulders,  and  sometimes  above  the  loins. 
As  weak  as  such  a  back  may  appear,  it  is  more  an 
eyesore,  as  such  horses  oftentimes  show  good  quali- 
ties, provided  their  hindquarters  are  powerful 
enough  to  take  up  the  increased  weight  thrown  upon 
them.  Horses  with  very  weak  backs  oftentimes 
curve  up  the  same  spasmodically  under  heavy 
weight,  thereby  deceiving  the  inexperienced.  Light 
riding,  in  free  gaits  and  on  soft  ground,  will  show 
very  soon  whether  power  or  weakness  is  the  reason 
for  the  curving  up. 

The  foremost  part  of  the  column  of  the  vertebrae, 
which  is  not  destined  to  carry  weight,  namely,  the 
"  Neck,''  is,  through  the  kind  of  its  connection  with 
the  spinal  column,  of  high  importance  for  the  free 
action  of  the  forehand.  A  high  set-up  neck  is  of 
great  value,  not  only  through  the  relief  it  gives  to 
the  forehand,  but  also  through  the  favorable  direc- 
tion for  the  contraction  of  the  muscles,  lifting  tho 


THE  SKELETON.  13 

shoiilder-joiut,  and  which  take  their  issue  from  the 
neck.  But  the  neck  must  be  set-up  high  through 
the  length  of  its  vejiebrce,  besides  a  well-formed  curve 
of  the  withers. 

A  high  set-up  neck,  by  a  flat  arch  of  the  vertebrae 
of  the  withers,  gives  the  horse  a  good  enough  appear- 
ance, but  goes  on  cost  of  the  bearing  power  of  the 
back. 

FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  HIND  LEGS. 

Considering  the  functions  of  the  hind  legs  (see 
Fig.  14),  we  find  that  their  activity  in  the  footing, 
supporting  and  propelling  of  the  burden,  is  best 
compared  with  that  of  elastic  springs.  In  motion 
this  burden  inclines  forward,  the  lower  part  of 
the  spriug,  the  hoof,  is  brought  forward  under  the 
body  to  support  its  centre  of  gravity. 

In  this  first  moment  the  leg  performs  a  swing 
forward  around  the  hip-joint. 

In  the  second  moment  the  hoof  foots  on  the 
ground  and  the  leg  takes  up  the  burden. 

In  the  third  moment  the  body  moves  forward  over 
the  hoof  resting  on  the  ground ;  the  upper  part  of  the 
leg  moves  over  and  around  the  lower  part  of  the  leg. 
The  spring  acts,  pushing ;  the  more  it  gets  relieved 
of  the  burden  the  more  powerful  it  pushes  the  same 
forward,  and  the   farther  it  is  moved  forward  the 


14  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOBSE. 

more  will  the  spring  act  horizontally  and  spaciously 
on  the  same. 

In  the  fourth  moment  the  under  end  of  the  spring 
(the  hoof)  leaves  the  ground,  swinging  itself  off 
elastically ;  the  farther  back,  the  more  powerful 
pushing  to  forward;  the  farther  under  the  burden,  the 
higher  throwing  the  same  upward.  Then  the  whole 
process  begins  anew. 

Therefore,  we  distinguish  the  moments  of  the  ex- 
tending^ the  footiRgy  the  supporting,  and  the  propelling. 

It  is  apparent  that  the  ability  of  the  hind  legs  to 
cover  much  ground  can  only  then  be  a  considerable 
one,  if  the  combination  of  the  bones,  set  angularly 
to  each  other,  is  such  as  to  admit  not  only  of  their 
stepping  far  forward,  as  also  of  their  holding  out  far 
behind  the  perpendicular.  The  aspect  presented  by 
a  well-formed  hind  leg  in  performing  such  a  move- 
ment is  composed  of  the  following  details : 

(1)  The  leg  should  be  raised  with  lightly  and 
equally  bent  joints,  and  be  placed  quick  and  far 
under  the  body. 

(2)  In  taking  np  the  burden  (footing)  only  the  fet- 
lock should  bend  moderately. 

(3)  The  fetlock  should  rise  up  again  light  and 
elastic  under  the  weight  moving  forward  and  over  it, 
and  the  leg  should  hold  out  long  behind  the  perpen- 
dicular. 


THE  SKELETON.  lo 

(4)  Tlie  propulsion,  or  the  free  swinging-off,  must 
be  light  but  powerful,  extending  and  springy,  neither 
jerk-like  nor  contractile,  but  the  hoof  should  hold 
out  long  in  the  air  and  show  the  shoe,  without 
turning  over  the  fetlock. 

All  these  movements  should  pass  over  into  each 
other  with  ease,  without  making  the  impression  of 
great  exertion. 

Let  us  now  consider  which  proportions  in  the 
framework  most  favor  the  action  of  the  hind  legs. 

The  sjmial  column  rests  firm  and  immovable  upon 
the  haunch  bones,  whose  foremost  parts  are  visible 
in  the  projecting  hip  bones,  and  are  ending  in  the 
ischium  bones,  which  form  the  posterior  parts  of  the 
haunches.  Between  the  hip  and  the  ischium  bones, 
but  considerably  nearer  the  latter,  the  haunch 
bones  have  on  either  side  a  socket,  in  which  the 
head  of  the  thigh  bones  are  inserted. 

This  latter  bone  it  is  which  moves  the  whole  hind 
leg  attached  to  it,  forward  and  backward.  The 
wider  the  circle  described  by  the  thigh  bone  around 
its  centre,  the  further  can  the  hoof  be  placed  for- 
ward under  or  backward  behind  the  body.  The 
most  room  for  the  placement  of  a  long  thigh  bone 
will  be  under  a  haunch  lying  nearly  horizontal,  but 
its  lower  end,  the  stifle-joint,  should  not  transgress 
the  vertical  line  from  the  hip  to  the  ground. 


16  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

The  length  of  the  haunch  hones,  determiniDg  tliat  of 
the  croup,  can  never  be  too  large,  because  with  this 
length  increases  not  only  the  length  of  the  thigh 
bone,  but  also  the  distance  of  the  hip  joint  from  the 
hip,  and  also  from  the  point  of  the  ischium.  With 
the  largeness  of  these  dimensions  grows  also  the 
space  for  the  development  of  the  most  important 
muscles  for  the  extending  and  propelling  power  of 
the  hind  leg ;  besides  developing  a  more  favorable 
condition  for  the  contractile  power  of  the  muscles 
between  their  two  fastening  points.  The  angle 
formed  between  haunch  and  thigh  bone  varies 
between  80  and  100  degrees.  In  the  stifle-joint 
the  thigh  bone  is  connected  with  the  leg  bone, 
under  an  angle  of  about  120  degrees.  Hip 
and  stifle-joint  together  are  generally  called  the 
"haunches,"  and  the  pliability  of  these  two  joints 
is  called  *'  the  contractibility  of  the  haunches." 

The  haunches,  as  well  as  the  thigh  hone,  are,  on 
their  surfaces,  covered  with  so  many  powerful  mus- 
cles that  their  structure  and  connection  can  only 
be  judged  by  the  formation  and  the  length  of  the 
croup  and  the  position  of  the  stifle-joint.  The  loca- 
tion of  the  latter  is  of  great  importance,  as  it  enables 
us  to  draw  a  conclusion  as  to  the  length  and  oblique- 
ness of  the  thigh  bone.  A  well-formed  stifle-joint 
reaches  with  its  forward  point  near  to  the  perpen- 


THE  SKELETON.  17 

dicular  line  from  tlie  posterior  point  of  the  hip  to 
the  ground,  and  looked  at  from  behind,  its  position 
must  appear  so  far  outward  that  the  horse  looks 
broader  there  than  in  the  hips  (Fig.  10a).  While 
the  haunch  and  thigh  bones  are  enclosed  by  volumi- 
nous muscles,  and  consequently  their  outlines  can 
be  only  indistinctly  traced,  the  position  of  the  lower 
parts  of  the  leg  are  easily  discernible. 

The  leg  hone  is  connected  at  its  upper  end  with  the 
thigh  bone  through  the  stifle-joint,  at  its  lower  end 
with  the  shank  bone  through  the  hock-joint.  The 
leg  bone  is,  likewise,  especially  in  its  upper  parts, 
clothed  with  powerful  muscles,  which,  in  connection 
with  those  of  the  thigh  bone,  are  called  "the  hose." 
Every  bone  of  great  length,  and  surrounded  by  mus- 
cles, has  the  advantage  of  the  muscles  affixing  them- 
selves in  larger  quantities  on  the  same,  therefore 
adding,  through  its  greater  length,  to  the  energy  of 
the  motions.  The  same  is  the  case  with  the  leg 
bone.  The  favorable  formation  of  a  good  thigh 
bone  will,  therefore,  be  completed  by  a  long  leg 
bone.  Such  a  leg  bone  finds  only  room  under  a 
stifle-joint  placed  far  forward  and  outward,  from 
which  it  runs  in  an  oblique  direction  from  forward 
and  outward  to  backward  and  inward,  to  connect  in 
its  lower  end  through  the  hock  joint  with  the  shank 
bone.    The  limit  to  which  the  leg  bone  may  extend 


18  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

downward  and  backward  must  be  the  result  of  the 
conditions  under  wliicli  the  position  and  angular 
conformation  of  the  hock  joint  answers  best  the  laws 
of  burdens. 

The  position  of  the  hock  joint  should  be  such  that  its 
posterior  end,  the  hock  lever-bone,  shall  just  be  met 
by  a  lot  from  the  ischium  bone,  and  that  this  lot 
should  run  down  along  the  shank  bone.  Viewed 
from  behind,  the  hock  joints  should  come  closer 
together  than  the  stifle-joint.  The  joint,  besides 
showing  sharp  outlines,  must  make  the  impression 
of  massiveness;  and  not  only  the  cross-section 
should  be  considerable,  but  also  the  extension  from 
front  to  rear,  as  seen  from  the  side.  This  latter 
dimension  depends  principally  upon  the  length  of 
the  lever-bone,  as  representing  the  common  lever 
for  the  action  of  the  muscles  of  the  hose,  and,  there- 
fore, for  all  the  propulsive  powers  of  the  hind  legs. 

The  shank  hone  should  show  a  perpendicular  posi- 
tion and  appear  quite  broad  when  looked  at  from 
the  side ;  the  cords  on  its  backside  must  appear 
sharply  separated  from  the  bone  and  from  each 
other.  The  shank  bone,  serving  only  as  a  support, 
and  not  as  a  fastening  place  for  the  muscles,  is  only 
then  favorably  formed,  if  it  is  as  short  as  possible. 

In  i\iQ  fetlock  or  upper  pastern-joint  the  shank  bone 
should  be  connected  with  the  fetlock  under  an  angle 


THE  SKELETON.  19 

of  140  degrees.  The  small  pastern  and  the  coffin 
bone  follow  in  the  direction  of  the  fetlock  bone,  and 
are  connected  by  equally  named  joints.  The  lower 
part  of  the  small  pastern  bone,  the  coffin  joint 
and  coffin  bone,  are  encased  in  the  hoof. 

On  the  length  of  the  fetlock  hone  depend  consider- 
ably the  speed,  elasticity  and  extent  of  the  steps. 
A  long  spring  develops  a  more  telling  force  than  a 
short  one,  whereas  the  latter  can  stand  a  greater 
pressure.  Likewise  the  long  fetlock  has  the  greater 
elasticity,  while  the  short  one  will  carry  a  heavier 
weight.  The  fetlock  must  be  formed  according  to 
the  demands  of  either  elasticity  or  carrying  power, 
but  the  elasticity  must  always  be  in  proper  relation 
with  the  length  of  the  former.  The  long  elastic 
fetlock  of  the  race  horse  and  the  short,  hard  fetlock 
of  the  draught  horse  are  both  good  in  their  place. 
The  long,  soft  and  relaxing  fetlock  is  bad  with  any 
animal ;  it  will  succumb  under  the  burden  without 
producing  any  elasticity.  The  short,  straight 
fetlock,  bare  of  any  springiness,  ruins  joints  and 
ligaments. 

FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  FOKE  LEGS. 

Let  US  now  consider  the  functions  of  the  fore  legs, 
and  we  find  a  repetition  of  the  four  moments  we 
had  to  distinguish  in  the  hind  legs,  viz.,  the  extend- 


20  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

ing,  the  footing,  the  supporting  and  the  propelling; 
but  there  is  a  decided  difference  between  fore  and 
hind  leg  in  the  second  and  fourth  moments,  viz.,  the 
footing  and  the  propelling.  The  fore  leg  exerts  its 
greatest  power  in  the  moment  of  footing,  a  minor 
one  in  the  moment  of  propelling  (or  swinging-off),  the 
contrary  being  the  case  with  the  hind  leg. 

At  the  second  moment  the  fore  leg  has  to  take  up 
almost  the  entire  force  of  the  concussion  produced 
by  the  weight  in  connection  with  the  motion,  to  pre- 
vent the  body  from  turning  a  summersault ;  but  at 
the  fourth  moment  the  fore  leg  cannot  do  much  in  the 
vray  of  tossing  the  burden  forward,  because  its 
elasticity  is  not  transferred  to  a  firm  basis  of  bones 
of  the  rump,  but  is  reduced  to  a  minimum  by  being 
connected  with  the  side  part  of  the  chest  by  mus- 
cles only. 

The  conditions  under  which  the  fore  legs  fulfil 
their  task  best  are  easiest  observed  in  the  trot. 

The  general  points  for  a  fine  action  in  the  trot,  are: 

(1)  Light,  free  and  high  raising  of  the  leg  from 
the  shoulder  with  well-bent  knee ;  far,  light  and 
powerful  extending  from  the  shoulder;  gradual 
stretching  forward  of  the  parts  underneath  the  knee, 
so  that  the  leg  looks  straight  only  when  the  hoof 
touches  the  ground. 

(2)  Footing  on  the  full  hoof. 


THE   SKELETON.  21 

(3)  Long  holding  out  of  tlie  leg  behind  the  per- 
pendicular. 

All  these  moments  of  the  action  should  pass  over 
into  each  other  with  ease,  and  should  not  show  any 
Interruption ;  they  should  be  elastic,  without  making 
the  impression  of  exertion  or  convulsive  strain  of  the 
muscles. 

Let  us  now  examine  the  construction  of  the  fore 
leg. 

The  sTioulder-hlades  encase  and  support  the  chest 
in  its  forward  part  on  both  sides,  and  are  only 
fastened  to  it  by  muscles  and  the  outer  skin.  Their 
motions  are  upward  and  downward  around  a  pivot, 
located  about  four  fingers  below  their  upper  edge ; 
consequently  the  upper  part  of  the  shoulder,  above 
that  pivot,  will  move  backward  and  downward,  when 
the  part  below  the  pivot  moves  forward  and  up- 
warcL  This  motion  of  the  upper  part  of  the  shoulder 
is  interfered  with,  should  the  saddle  be  shifting 
forrrard.  High  and  sharp  withers,  preventing 
suoh  shifting  of  the  saddle,  are  an  indispensable 
quality  in  a  saddle-horse.  Besides  this  movability 
ot  the  shoulder  forward  and  backward,  it  has  a  very 
elight  capability  for  sideward  motions,  though 
limited. 

The  flexibility  of  the  shoulder  is  the  cause  of  the 
horse's  ability  to  lift  his  fore  legs  considerably  with- 


22  HOW  TO   JUDGE   A   HORSE. 

out  the  spinal  colamu  abandoning  its  horizontal 
position,  or  without  molesting  to  any  degree  the 
hind  hand  with  the  weight  of  the  forehand  thereby 
reducing   its  propelling  powers. 

At  its  lower  end,  the  shoulder-blade  is  connected 
with  the  arm  hone,  through  the  shoulder  joint,  under 
an  angle  of  80  to  100  degrees. 

Shoulder  blade  and  arm  bone  in  their  relation 
have  much  similarity  wilih  the  thigh  and  leg  bone 
of  the  hind  leg.  What  is  said  about  the  position  of 
these  two  latter  bones  and  their  combination  holds 
good  also  for  shoulder  blade  and  arm  bone.  The 
shoulder  must  be  long  and  oblique,  which  is  only 
possible  if  its  upper  and  rear  edge  reaches  far  back 
at  the  side  of  the  withers.  The  arm  bone  also  must 
distinguish  itself  by  considerable  length  and  an 
oblique  position.  Under  these  conditions  both  bones 
are  jointed  under  a  right  angle.  The  shoulder  joint 
has  then  a  large  opening  capacity,  and,  the  length 
of  the  bones  being  considerable,  the  faculty  of  ex- 
tension of  the  leg  is  a  great  one.  Furthermore, 
between  these  two  long  bones  the  masses  of  muscles 
can  accumulate  in  larger  proportions  and  receive 
the  most  favorable  direction  for  action.  The  main 
stress  in  judging  the  upper  part  of  the  fore  leg  is 
always  to  be  laid  on  tlie  oblique  direction  and  length  of 
the  arm  hone.     If  these  qualities  are  there,  the  leg  is 


THE   SKELETON.  23 

capable  of  exteuding  itself  far  forYv^ard  and  holding 
out  far  backward  behind  the  perpendicular,  though 
the  shoulder  may  be  a  little  longer  or  shorter. 

A  short  shoulder  by  excellent  length  of  the  arm 
bone  we  find  in  all  animals,  which  by  a  high  location 
of  the  shoulder  joint,  distinguish  themselves  by  supe- 
rior swiftness — as  greyhounds,  deer,  etc.  The  ex- 
amination of  horses,  which  by  great  freedom  of 
shoulder  show  extraordinary  speed,  proves  that  they 
frequently  have  a  very  oblique— not  a  long-shoul- 
der, but  a  very' long  arm  bone;  whereas  the  defect 
of  a  short  arm  bone  cannot  be  counterbalanced  by  a 
long  and  oblique  shoulder;  the  long  and  far-reach- 
ing steps  out  of  the  latter,  consequently  disappears, 
and  only  the  high  action  is  left.  A  shoulder  only 
long,  but  without  obliqueness,  may  become  detrimen- 
tal, the  shoulder  joint  being  placed  too  low  down. 
Furthermore,  it  must  be  taken  in  consideration  that 
the  shoulder-blade  forms  the  basis  for  the  neck, 
which  will  be  set  up  higher,  the  more  oblique 
the  shoulders  are;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  will  appear 
broader  and  more  projecting,  the  straighter  the  latter 
are.  The  farther  the  head  and  neck  are  projecting,  the 
f:\rther  is  the  leg  compelled  to  step  forward  to  sup- 
port the  weight;  but,  with  a  straight  shoulder,  this 
is  impossible,  although  very  necessary.  With  the 
length  of  the  steep  shoulder,  the  basis  of  the  neck 


24  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

becomes  broader,  and  tlie  weight  of  the  latter  grows 
larger.  The  fastest,  and  so  very  shoulder  free  race- 
horses, have  the  thinnest  necks. 

The  elhoio  joint  connects  the  arm  bone  with  the 
fore  arm.  This  latter  consists  of  the  fore  arm  bone 
and  the  elbow  bone ;  the  latter,  with  its  elongation, 
called  the  lever  of  the  elhoio,  extending  considerably 
beyond  the  rear  part  of  the  elbow  joint.  On  this 
lever  are  fastened  the  extensor  tendons,  emanating 
from  the  shoulder-blade,  and  acting  on  the 
elbow  bone  when  the  leg  is  supporting  or  push- 
ing the  weight  forward,  like  on  a  one-armed  lever, 
the  prop  resting  on  the  ground,  and  the  weight  to 
be  lifted  and  moved  on  the  elbow  joint.  The  extend- 
ing activity  of  the  muscles  on  this  lever  comes  espe- 
cially into  play,  as  the  leg  pushes  the  weight  forward. 
This  activity  becomes,  then,  of  the  same  importance 
for  the  fore  arm,  as  the  united  activity  of  the  muscle« 
of  the  hose  and  the  extensors  of  the  hock  joint  for 
the  hind  legs,  namely,  as  a  pushing  and  elastic 
power.  For  this  reason  has  a  long  projection  of  the 
elbow  the  same  advantages  of  a  long  lever,  as  the 
lever  bone  of  the  hock  joint.  A  long  projection  of 
the  elbow  has  the  further  advantage  of  granting  the 
necessary  space  for  the  full  development  of  the  mus- 
cles of  the  fore  arm,  which  rest  partly  on  the  former, 
and,  in  which  case,  the  upper  part  of  the  fore  arm, 


THE  SKELETON.  2§ 

seen  from  the  side,  makes  the  impression  of  impos- 
ing width. 

Great  length  of  the  forearm,  as  a  bone  enveloped 
by  muscles,  adds  considerably  to  the  execution  of 
powerful  movements  of  the  lower  parts  of  the  leg. 
At  least  a  short  fore  arm  in  a  long  leg  is  at  all  times 
an  unfavorable  formation,  brought  about  b}^  a  too 
great  and  injurious  length  of  the  cannon  bone.  For 
the  dimensions  of  the  cannon  bone,  the  fetlock,  etc., 
the  same  rules  are  decisive  as  on  the  hind  legs. 

Comparative  value  of  the  different  hones  and  joints. 
(See  Fig.  14) 

If  I  said  that  the  importance  of  the  shoulder 
blade  and  arm  bone  for  the  movements  of  the  fore 
leg  be  equal  to  that  of  the  thigh  bone  and  leg  bone 
of  the  hind  leg,  I  find  myself  seemingly  in  contradic- 
tion with  the  usual  opinions,  viz :  that  the  shoulder 
is  as  the  haunch  bone  of  the  fore  leg ;  that  the  arm 
bone  corresponds  with  the  thigh  bone,  and  the  fore 
arm  with  the  leg  bone  ;  and  that,  therefore,  the  elbow 
joint  has  a  similar  relation  to  the  stifle  joint,  and 
the  elbow  to  the  stifle.  From  an  anatomical  stand- 
point, these  views  may  be  correct;  but  viewing  the 
different  bones  and  joints  from  the  standpoint  of 
the  movements  and  performances  executed  by  them, 
we  will  come  to  a  different  opinion.  For  instance^ 
the  movements  of  the  arm  bone  are  not  the  same 


26  HOW   TO   JUDGE   A   HOJlSE. 

as  those  of  the  thigh  Lone;  the  elbow  joint  is  not 
in  the  same  relation  for  the  forward  movement  of 
the  fore  leg  as  is  the  stifle  joint  for  the  hind  leg,  its 
chief  activity  comiug  into  play  during  the  act  of 
pushing  forward. 

If  we  look  at  the  different  bones  and  joints  of  the 
haunches,  we  find  that  the  thigh  bone  corresponds 
with  the  shoulder-blade  of  the  fore  leg,  the  leg  bone 
with  the  arm  bone,  etc. 

The  shoulder-blade  lies  parallel  with  the  thigh  bone 
(Fig  1%  page  29,  a  and  a),  and  their  motions,  in  ex- 
tending the  legs  forward  and  in  pushing  forward,  are 
precisely  in  the  same  direction,  though  the  shoulder- 
blade  is  less  movable,  different  in  form,  and,  at  its 
upper  end,  fastened  only  to  muscles  and  not  to  a 
socket  like  the  thigh  bone.  But  these  are  modifica- 
tions brought  about  and  justified  through  its  cramped 
but  otherwise  safe  position  at  the  vault  of  the  chest. 
The  very  movable  shoulder  can  never  be  compared 
with  the  totally  unmovable  haunch  bones.  These 
latter  enclose  the  internal  and  posterior  cavity  of  the 
rump  in  the  shape  of  a  firm  bony  ring,  similar  to 
the  ribs,  enclosi'jg  the  organs  of  the  chest,  a  task 
which  the  shoulder-blade  has  nothing  to  do  with. 
This  firm  ring  of  bone  could  go  in  close  connection 
with  the  thigh  bone ;  the  movable  and  less  resisting 
ribs  could  form  a  union  with  the  uppermost  bone  of 


THE   SKELETON.  ^7 

tlie  leg  (tlie  shoulder-blade)  only  on  a  broader  basis 
and  in  an  elastic  manner;  a  flat  bone  of  the  sliape 
of  the  shoulder-blade  only  being  fit  for  that  pur- 
pose. 

Beticeen  arm  hone  and  leg  hone  (Fig.  l"",  b  and  h'), 
running  likewise  in  the  same  direction,  the  similarity, 
also  in  regard  to  shape,  is  a  larger  one.  At  the 
upper  end  of  the  arm  bone  the  cartilaginous  roller 
for  the  flexor  tendon  of  the  fore  arm  represents  the 
stifle  of  the  hind  leg.  The  lower  end  cf  the  arm 
bone  forms  a  joint,  on  the  backside  of  which  the 
lever  of  the  elbow  presents  exactly  the  same  lever 
as  on  the  hock  joint  (c  and  c'). 

The  two  bones  connected  by  the  knee  joint,  the 
fore  arm  and  shin  hone,  run  both  in  the  same  perpen- 
dicular direction  as  the  slianh  hone  of  the  hind  leg 
and  represent  together  (taken  as  supporting  bones) 
the  shank  bone  of  the  hind  leg  (d  and  d').  lu  every 
position— forward  or  backward — which  the  fore  leg 
assumes  in  supporting,  both  these  bones  always 
represent  a  straight  line,  one  supporting  column,  in 
which  function  the  joint  in  the  knee  may  be  con- 
sidered as  not  existing.  The  knee  joint  should  not 
be  movable  if  under  weight,  and  it  also  shows  no 
lever  projections  on  which  muscles  could  pro- 
duce powerful  actions.  The  joint  must,  therefore, 
be  considered  simply  as  a  ruption  of  the  straight 


2s  HOW  TO   JUDGE   A   HOESE. 

column^  existing  onij  for  tlie  purpose  of  facilitating 
a  contraction  of  the  leg  while  bringing  the  same  for- 
ward. If  this  contraction,  between  fore  arm  and  shin 
bone  were  not  possible,  if  both  w^oiild  present  one 
uninterrupted  piece  of  bone  from  the  elbow  down  to 
the  fetlock  joint,  the  foot  in  moving  forward  would 
continually  strike  against  obstacles  on  the  ground. 
For  this  reason  the  knee  joint  is  indispensable. 
It  has  no  other  essential  task,  but  to  facilitate  a 
reduction  of  the  whole  length  of  the  leg.  It 
is  perfectly  justifiable  to  consider  the  shank  bone 
of  the  hind  leg,  during  the  period  of  supporting, 
equal  to  the  whole  column  from  the  elbow  down 
to  the  fetlock. 

If  we  consider,  in  this  manner,  the  forearm  as  an 
upward  extension  of  the  shin  bone,  then  the  elbow 
joint  corresponds  with  the  hock  joint,  the  shoulder 
joint  with  the  stifle-joint. 

The  principal  points,  in  comparing  the  different 
bones  and  joints,  should  always  be  the  similarity  of 
their  movements.  The  shoulder  joint  and  elbow 
joint  control  all  the  extensible  movements  of  the 
fore  leg,  in  the  same  manner,  as  the  stifle  joint  and 
hock  joint  govern  those  of  the  hind  leg.  Particulai'ly 
pronounced  is  the  similarity  of  the  actions,  if  we 
observe  the  effect  of  the  muscles  on  the  levers 
during  the   supporting  and  propelling  activity  of 


THE  SKELETON. 


29 


both  legs.  The  same  effect  which  the  muscles  of  the 
hose,  in  connection  with  the  Achill-chord,  perform  on 
the  iever  of  the  hock,  the  extensor  tendons  will 
perform  on  the  lever  of  the  elbow.  The  muscles  of 
the  hose  draw  the  lever  of  the  hock  toward  the  thigh 
bone,  and,  the  thigh  bone  being  simultaneously 
moved  backward  by  the  muscles  of  the  croup,  all  the 
upper  joints  will  be  opened. 

Fig.  la. 


This  sudden  extension  of  the  leg  represents  the 
propelling  activity  of  the  hind  leg,  the  hock  joint 
forming  the  near  and  the  ground  the  more  remote  ful- 
crum. The  same  is  the  case  with  the  fore  leg.  The 
extensors  acting  on  the  elbow,  at  the  same  time  the 
shoulder  joint  being  opened  at  the  front  side  by  the 
long  flexor  of  the  fore  arm,  the  same  sudden  elonga- 


so  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

tion  of  the  whole  column  takes  place,  and,  with  it,  a 
tossing,  elastic  action,  though,  on  account  of  the 
shortness  of  the  angularly  connected  bones,  with 
less  force  than  that  produced  on  the  hind  leg. 

The  elbow  joint  must,  therefore,  be  considered  as 
the  hock  joint,  that  is,  the  spring  joint  of  the  fore  leg. 
With  the  stifle-joint  it  has  nothing  else  in  common 
except  being  in  position  of  nearly  equal  height  on 
the  rump,  the  necessity  for  which  there  are  other 
reasons.  The  knee  cannot  be  compared  with  the 
hock,  because  a  spring-like  action  can  never  be 
produced  by  a  joint,  which,  while  the  leg  is  in 
the  moment  of  supporting,  permits  no  consider- 
able angular  variations  between  the  connecting 
bones.  For  the  better  understanding  of  these 
facts,  the  drawing  (Fig.  1^)  is  added.  The  cor- 
responding joints  :  shoulder  and  stifle  joints,  elbow 
and  hock  joints,  and  the  two  fetlock  joints  are 
connected  by  dotted  lines,  while  the  various  bones 
of  equal  value  are  marked  by  letters  :  a  and  a',  etc. 
Especially  observe  the  two  lever  projections  of 
the  elbow  and  the  hock  (c  and  c)  so  as  to  become 
convinced  that  it  is  from  there  that  the  propelling 
and  the  tossing  ]Dower  of  the  muscles  for  fore  and 
hind  leg  is  developed  in  exactly  the  same  manner; 
and  that  the  comparison  of  the  respective  parts  of 
the  legs  is  correct. 


THE  SKELETON.  31 

THE  ANGULAR  COMBINATION  OF  THE  BONES. 

Thus  far,  we  Lave  considered  those  qualities  of  the 
skeleton  of  the  horse,  bearing  relation  to  the  exten- 
sion and  safety  of  its  movements.  Now  let  us  discuss 
those  qualities  necessary  for  the  preservation  of  the 
limbs. 

The  limbs  are  exposed  to  the  most  violent  shocks. 
Not  only  the  weight  of  the  horse's  own  body,  but  also 
that  of  the  rider,  falls  on  them  at  every  step,  and 
with  an  increased  force  in  sharp  gaits  and  in  jump- 
ing. The  starting  point  of  these  shocks  is  the 
ground.  From  there  the  rebound  meets  first  the 
hoof,  and  passes  upward,  diminishing  in  force,  over 
the  whole  column.  The  bones,  joints,  and  sinews 
nearest  the  ground  suffer  most,  as  is  proved  by  the 
overwhelming  number  of  lamenesses  occuring  on  the 
lower  leg.  Furthermore,  the  rebound  is  the  more 
destructive,  as  our  hard  roads  make  shoeing  an  im- 
perative necessity,  thereby  diminishing  the  expansive 
power  of  the  hoof.  The  force  of  these  jerks  and 
shocks  is  broken  by  the  angles  under  which  the 
different  bones  are  jointed  together.  The  majority 
of  the  joints  transmit  the  rebound  only  partly  to  the 
higher  bones.  The  ligaments  and  sinews  transmit 
a  large  portion  of  the  shock  to  farther  removed 
points  of  the  column.     On  the  upper  part  of  the 


32  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 

limbs,  we  find  the  longest  bones ;  the  angles  formed 
by  them  the  narrowest,  and  the  connectiDg  joints  the 
strongest.  Where  the  connections  are  the  straight- 
est,  as  in  the  lower  parts,  which  are  most  exposed 
to  the  concussions,  there  we  find,  for  the  purpose  of 
diminishing  the  concussions,  three  joints  in  the 
distance  of  a  span  of  the  hand,  viz.:  the  upper  and 
lower  pastern  and  the  coffin  joint. 

With  the  advantages  of  a  narrow  angular  forma- 
tion, grow  also  the  extending  ability  of  the  limbs, 
and  the  space  for  the  development  of  powerful 
muscles,  as  we  have  seen  above,  thereby  making  the 
mechanical  proportions  the  most  favorable.  We 
find  very  favorable  angular  formations  principally  in 
the  exquisite  structure  of  the  race-horse  :  the  long 
fetlock,  the  oblique  thigh  and  armbone,  etc.,  enabling 
the  horse  to  cover  much  ground,  and  to  exhibit  ex- 
traordinary staying  power,  and  at  the  same  time 
protecting  it  against  hard  concussions.  The  low 
bred  horse,  on  the  contrary,  is  characterized  by  the 
straight  formation  of  its  limbs,  short  and  unelastic 
action,  and  by  showing  the  effects  of  great  exertions, 
oftentimes  by  inflammation  of  the  joints. 

On  the  other  side,  the  oblique  position  of  the  long 
bones  has  also  its  limit  in  the  reduction  of  the  carry- 
ing power.  The  more  favorable  the  angular  forma- 
tions, the  greater  the  demand  on  the  ability,  espe- 


THE   SKELETON.  33 

ciallj  on  the  firmness  of  sinews  and  ligaments, 
therefore  the  acuteness  of  the  angles  should  not 
transgress  certain  limits.  A  disproportion  is 
oftentimes  found  in  the  half-breeds,  where  the 
long  bones,  an  inheritance  of  one  parent,  do  not 
receive  the  necessary  support  from  the  loose  fibres 
from  the  other  parent,  producing  crippled  limbs 
within  a  short  time. 

Riders,  without  judgment,  often  taking  the 
increased  carrying  power  and  hard  inelasticity  of 
the  straight  formations  for  signs  of  strength,  attack 
and  ruin  the  joints  quickly;  sometimes  they  consider 
the  elasticity  of  the  favorable  formations  as  weakness 
and  are  afraid  to  touch  the  animal. 

If  we  find  a  deviation  from  the  normal,  one  joint 
too  straight,  another  too  oblique,  the  latter  will  have 
to  bear  the  concussion  intended  for  both.  In  a 
horse  standing  straight  in  his  hocks,  the  fetlock 
joints  will  receive,  in  an  increased  proportion,  the 
shock  from  the  bur  J  en.  Also,  a  horse,  straight  in 
the  haunches  (hip-  and  stifle-joints),  but  very  oblique 
in  the  hock  joints,  will  suffer  in  the  latter. 

The  fore  leg,  the  angles  of  which,  between  shoulder 
blade  and  arm  boDe,  and  between  arm  bone  and  fore 
arm,  are  summarily  narrower  (as  on  the  hind  leg  the 
angles  between  thigh  bone  and  leg  bone,  and  between 
leg  bone  and  shank  bone),  receives,  through  the  mus- 


34  HOTV   TO   JUDGE   A   HOESE. 

cular  connection  between  shoulder  blade  and  chest, 
the  benefit  of  greater  elasticity  against  the  effects  of 
the  rebound.  But,  nevertheless,  the  latter  has  a 
stronger  and  more  destructive  effect  on  the  fore  leg, 
being  nearer  the  centre  of  gravity  and  eventually 
burdened  with  the  weight  of  the  rider.  Horseman- 
ship is  eagerly  bent  on  attaining  a  greater  develop- 
ment of  the  muscles  of  the  back,  an  increased 
employment  of  the  hind  legs,  for  the  purpose  of 
reducing  the  weight  of  the  fore  hand. 

It  is  an  important  part  of  the  examination  to  see 
whether  the  limbs  are  correctly  jointed ;  and,  by  de- 
viations from  the  normal  formation,  whether  those 
joints,  being  more  severely  taxed,  are  built  sufficiently 
strong  to  offer  increased  resistance. 

Just  as  the  above-mentioned  irregularities  may 
act  destructively  upon  the  neighboring  joint,  so  it  is 
with  all  irregularities  of  the  structure.  Perfectly 
built  animals  do  not  exist.  It  is  interesting  to 
observe  how  irregularities  are  multiplied  by  other 
irregularities,  or  again  counter-balanced.  The  com- 
binations in  this  way  are  innumerable.  Let  us  now 
consider  some  of  them. 

THE  POSITION  or  THE  HIND  LEGS. 

The  rump  of  the  horse  is  supported  by  four  pil- 
lars, whose  portability  is  fixed  by  mechanical  laws 


THE  SKELETON. 


35 


The  most  favorable  support  is  established  by  placing 
the  basis  under  the  weight  in  the  direction  of  its 
gravity.  In  other  words,  the  basis  of  the  hoof, 
on  the  ground,  falls  perpendicularly  under  the  hip 
joint.  No  exception  is  made  by  this  pillar,  being 
angularly  composed,  not  straight.  The  location  of 
the  hip  joint,  being  pretty  well  hidden,  at  least  only 
definable  by  the  aid  of  anatomical  knowledge,  this 
point  is  not  available  for  common  use  to  form  a  cor- 
rect idea  of  the  perpendicular  position  of  the  leg 
over  the  basis  of  the  hoof.  We  select,  therefore,  the 
posterior  end  of  the  haunches,  the  point  of  the 
ischium  bone,  and  drop  a  line  to  the  ground.  If  this 
perpendicular  just  touches  the  point  of  the  hock, 
and  from  there  is  running  down  the  back  of  the 
Bhank  bone,  then  the  hip  joint  will  be  nearly  per- 
FiG.  1.  Fig.  2. 


Normal  Position. 
Crood  Angular  Formation. 


Normal  Position. 
Bad  Angular  Formation 


36  HOW   TO   JUDGE   A   HOESE. 

penclicular  over  the  toe  of  the  hoof.     This  position 
of  the  hind  leg  is  called  the  normal. 

From  this  normal  position,  there  are  deviations  in 
two  directions.  In  many  cases  the  hock  joint  falls 
forward  of  this  perpendicular,  but,  more  frequently, 
it  falls  behind  the  same.  The  first  irregularity  we 
mny  call  the  under-standing,  the  second,  the  hack- 
sta7iding  position. 

It  is  apparent,  that,  with  this  change  of  basis, 
there  must  be  connected  a  variation  in  the 
weighting  of  the  joints,  and  that  the  column  is  not 
supported  in  itself.  The  perpendicular  weighting 
creates,  under  these  circumstances,  a  pressure  on  the 
whole  column  in  a  direction,  causing  the  same  to 
fall  over — in  the  under-standing  position  to  back- 
ward, and  in  the  hack-standing  position  to  forward. 
The  balance  can  only  be  preserved,  if  the  leg,  through 
its  muscles,  employs  such  forces  of  traction  and 
pressure  as  to  counteract  the  intention  of  gravity  to 
overturn  the  column. 

In  the  under-standing  position  of  the  hind  leg,  the 
uppermost  point  of  the  column,  viz.:  the  femural 
head  of  the  thigh  bone,  has  a  tendency  of  fallinc^ 
backward  (Fig.  3) ;  therefore,  an  opposing  power 
must  be  employed  to  enable  the  leg  in  this  position 
to  fulfil  its  task  as  a  supporter.  For  this  task,  the 
whole  group  of  muscles  of  the  hose  is  qualified  as 


THE   SKELETON.  37 

being  also  in  close  connection  with  the  flexors  run- 
ning downward  on  the  rear  side  of  the  hock  and 
fetlock  joints.  An  increased  traction  of  the  muscles, 
and,  consequently,  an  increased  tension  of  the  above- 
mentioned  flexors,  has  to  neutralize  the  deviation  in 
the  position.  On  the  other  hand,  such  permanent  and 
increased  tension  of  the  sinews  will  make  itself  felt 
in  its  consequences,  and  in  the  course  of  time  by  a 
straight  position  of  the  fetlock.  It  is  apparent  that 
an  increased  and  continual  activity  of  the  flexors 
must  take  place,  not  only  at  rest,  but  also  in  motion, 
because,  during  the  latter,  the  leg  is  constantly  placed 
farther  forward  under  the  body,  than  in  the  case  of 
the  leg  being  jointed  normally. 

For  this  latter  reason,  horses  of  this  build  perform 
the  very  gathered  paces  and  short  stops  with  ease, 
but  the  holding  out  of  the  leg  behind  the  perpen- 
dicular will  suffer,  viz.:  the  propelling  and  the  spring- 
ing power — the  extensibility  will  not  be  equal  to  the 
carrying  capability.  Such  horses  will  never  be 
prominent,  neither  in  a  fast  trot  nor  in  running,  and 
will  bring  little  pressure  into  the  harness.  The 
direct  cause,  of  this  position  of  the  leg,  is  the  abnor- 
mal angular  formation  of  some  joint  in  connection 
with  an  abnormal  length  of  the  bones  enclosing  that 
joint.  All  the  different  combinations  cannot  be  ex- 
haustively discussed  on  account  of  their  magnitude, 


m 


HOW   TO  JUDGE   A   HORSE. 


because  eacli  bone,  taken  for  itself,  or  in  connection 
with  another,  may  be  the  cause.  But,  it  is  of  great 
importance,  for  the  judging,  to  distinguish  two  forms 
of  the  under-standing  position,  accordiiig  to  the 
bones  of  the  upper  or  the  lower  leg  being  the  cause. 
In  the  first  case,  the  disadvantages  are  not  great ;  in 
the  second,  quite  considerable. 

If,  through  the  extra  length  of  the  thigh  bone,  the 
stifle-joint  is  placed  far  forward,  but  the  leg  bone 
is  short,  and.  the  hock  joint  straight,  then  we  get  the 
understanding  position,  as  in  Fig  3.  But  here  the 
adversity  of  the  straight  and  unelastic  hock  joint  is 
nearly  compensated  by  the  favorable  length  and  the 
the  considerable  elasticity  of  the  thigh  bone.     Such 


Fig.  3. 


Fig.  4. 


Under-standing  Position 

by  Excellent  Thigh  Bone,  but 

Straight  Hock  Joint. 


Under-standing  Position 

Caused  by  ttie  Stifle-joint  Being 

Placed  Far  Forward, 


THE  SKELETON. 


39 


horses  are  quite  able,  tliougL  a  little  hard  in  their 
motions. 

Also  the  case,  in  Fig.  4,  where  the  exquisite  length 
and  obliqueness  of  the  thigh  bone  of  itself  alone  pro- 
duce the  under-standing  position,  while  the  other 
joints  are  normal,  is  to  be  judged  favorably. 

But,  if  the  thigh  bone  is  short  aud  the  stifle  joint 
stands  straight,  the  ableness  of  the  leg  will  under 
all  circumstances  be  inconsider-  ^^^-  5. 

able.  The  insignificant  flexi- 
bility of  the  upper  joints  throws 
the  weight,  in  an  increased  pro- 
portion, upon  the  lower  joints. 
In  the  case,  represented  in  Fig.  5, 
the  oblique  direction  of  the 
shank  bone  will  increase  the 
under-standing  position  still 
more,  at  the  same  time  narrow- 
ing the  angle  of  the  hock  joint, 
to  the  injury  of  the  latter.  Only 
the  short  radius  of  motion,  permitted  by  the  straight 
and  short  thigh  bone,  can  save  the  hock  joint  from 
too  frequent  injuries. 

The  hack-standing  position  of  the  hind  leg  is  per- 
ceptible in  that  the  line  from  the  ischium  bone  does 
not  meet  the  posterior  line  of  the  hock  and  the 
shank  bone,  but  is  running  down  in  front  of  the  same, 


Under-standing  Posi- 
tion Caused  by  a 
Short  Leg  Bone  and 
Defective  Direction 
of  the  Shanli  Bone. 


40  H0T7  TO  JUDGE   A   HOLSE. 

In  this  case,  the  leg  is  also  not  balanced  in  itself,  but 
has  to  employ  active  miibcnlar  powers  to  establish 
equilibrium.  But  different  muscles  and  cords, 
acting  in  a  directly  opposite  direction  from  those  in 
the  under-standing  position,  must  be  brought  into 
requisition  ;  therefore,  the  extensors  will  be  strained 
permanently  and  to  a  high  degree.  This  must  also 
take  place  in  motion,  leading,  finally,  to  a  reduced 
capability  of  the  extensor  tendons  for  the  movements 
of  the  leg  forward.  The  legs  cannot  be  placed 
sufficiently  under  the  weight,  and  will,  therefore,  not 
be  able  to  give  the  horse  the  necessary  support  in 
short  paces  and  stops. 

The  direct  cause  for  the  back-standing  position 
may  be  traced  to  a  defective  position,  or  unpro- 
portioned  length,  of  some  bone.  Which  bone  or 
joint  at  fault  is  very  essential,  for  the  criticism  of 
the  defect.  It  maybe  set  down,  as  a  geneal  rule,  that 
the  defect  is  most  serious  if  brought  about  by  in- 
sufficient length  and  steepness  of  the  thigh  bone,  as 
in  Fig.  6. 

If  the  thigh  bone  is  long  and  oblique,  while  the 
main  defect  exists  in  a  too  great  length  and  oblique- 
ness of  the  leg  bone,  as  in  Fig.  7,  then  the  formation 
is  only  unsightly,  but  the  leg  is  well  able  for  exertions 
especially  in  sharp  paces.  The  whole  column 
is  yerj  extensible,  the  leg  can  be  stretched  far  back- 


THE  SKELETON. 


41 


ward  and  tlie  muscles  of  the  haunclies  furnisli  a 
great  propelling  power,  as  can  be  observed  by  so- 
called  bow-legged  liorses  ;  but  tlie  weight  affects  the 
two  pastern  joints,  which  frequently  collapse  down- 
ward and  backward. 

In  judging  the  different  positions,  it  will  be  ob- 
served that  the  normal  shape  is  not  at  all  decisive 
for  the  working  ability  of  the  leg;  because,  the  cor- 
rect position  can  exist,  even  in  a  very  badly  formed 
and  unable  leg.  Fig.  2  shows  how,  in  a  leg  composed 
only  of  short  and  straight  angled  bones,  and  with- 
out any  ability  for  extension,  the  perpendicular  posi- 
tion may  be  found. 

Fig.  6.  Fig.  7 


>i^ 


Back-standing  Position,  Caused 

by  Bad  Location  of  the 

Stifle. 


Back  -  standing  Position, 

Caused  by  Great  Length 

of  the  Leg  Bone. 


THE  POSITION  OF  THE  FORE  LEGS. 

The  Uppermost    part    of  the  fore  leg  not  being 
inserted  in  a  firm  bone  like  the  thigh  bone,  but 


42  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

offering,  with  the  whole  inside  surface  of  the  shoulder, 
as  far  down  as  the  elbow,  fastening  points  for  the  con- 
necting muscles,  the  position  of  the  highest  point  of 
the  column  to  the  basis  of  the  hoof,  is  not  of  so  much 
concern  as  in  the  hind  leg.  It  will  be  pretty  near 
correct,  to  consider  the  elbow  joint  as  the  chief  sup- 
porting point  for  the  rump,  and  its  position  as  decid- 
ing. In  the  normal  position,  the  elbow  joint  stands 
perpendicularly  over  the  fetlock  joint,  and  generally 
a  line  from  the  shoulder  joint  will  meet  the  toe  of  the 
hoof.  If  we  examine  the  deviations  from  this  rule, 
we  will  find  them  to  be  in  two  directions.  In  the 
fore-standing  or  stretched  position,  the  fetlock  joint 
falls  forward  of  the  line  from  the  elbow  joint ;  in  the 
under-standing,  behind  the  same.  In  the  first  case, 
the  foot  stands  too  far  forward ;  in  the  latter,  too  far 
under  the  body. 

In  judging  the  fore-standing  position,  we  will  find 
that  all  muscles  and  sinews,  located  on  the  rear  side 
of  the  leg,  not  only  including  the  flexors  of  the 
lower  leg  from  the  knee  down,  but,  also,  the  extensors 
acting  on  the  elbow  lever,  have  to  work  and  carry 
weight  in  an  increased  proportion;  the  conse- 
quence being  that  horses,  with  this  formation,  fre- 
quently strain  their  sinews,  especially  if  the  fetlock 
is  very  long.  This  defect  will  be  augmented,  if  the 
leg  is  calf-hieed — that  means,  if  the  knee  stands  be- 


THE  SKELETON. 


43 


Fia.  8. 


hind  the  line.  At  all  events,  the  fore-standing  position 

is  by  far  more  injurious  in  the 

fore  leg  than  the  understanding 

in  the   hind  leg.     In    all    the 

different  gaits,  the  fore  leg  has 

to   exert  its  greatest   activity, 

and  is   most  imperiled,  while 

being  stretched  forward  and  in 

taking  up  the  burden.    But,  it 

is  apparent,  that  this  position 

must  increase  the  force  of  the 

weight  and  the  danger  of  over-    „ 

°      ^  ^      ^  Fore-standing,   Con- 

burdening  the  sinews.  nected  With  Calf-Knee. 

The  under-standing  position  is,  under  circum- 
stances, a  defect  without  consequences — more  of  an 
eye-sore— but  may  become  a  serious  blemish.  The 
consequence  of  this  position  is,  generally,  a  pro- 
truding crooked  knee,  less  visible  in  young  horses, 
but  more  developed  in  older  horses,  even  to  huck-knees. 
If,  with  the  huck-knee  is  connected  a  long  and  elastic 
fetlock,  and  a  long  arm  bone  (Fig.  10),  then  such 
horses  are  quite  fit  for  any  service,  and  go  safe. 

If  we  only  find  a  crooked  knee,  while  the  fetlock 
IM  short  and  straight,  as  in  Fig.  9,  then  they  go  very 
uiigafe  and  are  not  fit  for  saddle  use. 

THE   PROPORTIONS   OF  FORE   AND   HIND   LEGS. 

To  facilitate  a  regular  movement  of  the  fore  and 


u 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOKSE. 


Fig.  9. 


Fig.  10. 


Under-standing  Position,  Accom- 
panied by  Short  Fetlock  and 
Arm  Bone. 


Under-sta.nding  Position, 
Accompanied  by  a  Long 
Fetlock  and  Arm  Bone. 


hind  legs,  and  to  regulate  the  reciprocal  effects  of 
the  forces,  it  is  necessary  that  their  ability  for  ex- 
tending, propelling,  and  tossing-off  should  be  equally 
great.  Only  harmony  in  the  movements  can  secure 
endurance.  lb  is  better  that  fore  and  hind  legs 
possess  equal  qualities  in  motion,  if  ever  so  little, 
rather  than  have  no  harmony.  Not  for  every  pur- 
pose, do  we  need  fast  horses,  or  horses  of  great 
strength.  Agricultural  purposes,  for  instance,  require 
a  horse  with  enduring  qualities,  with  very  moderate 
speed  and  medium  strength — an  animal  whose  frame 
warrants  limited  motion,  but  endurance.  Impru- 
dent experiments  to  improve  the  race,  have  often 
been  the  cause  of  disturbing  the  harmonious  build 


THE  SKELETON.  45 

of  the  farm  horse.  Experience  in  breeding  shows 
that  the  foal  inherits  parts  of  its  form  and  con- 
stitution from  the  sire,  and  parts  from  the  dam, 
but  there  is  no  possibility  of  predicting  the  pro- 
portions. It  can  happen  that  the  product  of  a 
high  bred  sire  and  a  common  mare  possesses  a  free 
and  elastic  action  in  the  fore  hand,  while  the  hind 
hand  is  weak  and  trailing,  leaving  the  former  unsup- 
ported— in  front  as  a  lion,  behind  as  a  cow.  Likewise 
may  the  nobler  of  the  parents  transmit  the  long  and 
oblique  shoulders  upon  the  foal,  and,  the  common 
one,  the  flabbiness  of  the  fibres  of  the  muscles  and 
sinews.  The  noble  part  of  the  inheritance  can 
only  be  propelled  by  powerfully  contractible  muscles, 
and  supported  only  by  firmly  organized  chords  and 
ligaments  ;  but  the  flabby  ligaments  are  not  able  to 
protect  the  angular  joint  connections.  In  such  cross-* 
products,  we  have  an  opportunity  to  observe,  that, 
while  they  may  show  a  wide  step,  they  lack  energy 
in  the  propulsion.  Also,  we  may  observe  how  liga- 
ments and  chords  of  the  narrow  angled  joints  suffer 
under  the  increased  pressure,  and  how,  after  light 
exertions,  all  sorts  of  blemishes  appear  on  the 
bones.  Even,  if  the  energy  of  the  nobler  part  has 
been  transmitted  unimpaired,  we  see  the  other 
inheritance,  the  bad  foundation,  succumb  under  the 
too  great  demands  of  the  former. 


46  HOW   TO   JUDGE   A   HOKSE. 

If  there  exists  iu  tlie  formations  a  disproportion 
between  fore  and  liiud  hand,  the  question  arises, 
what  kind  of  service  will  be  required  of  the  horse? 
For  the  carriage  horse,  a  small  superior  roominess 
of  the  action  of  the  hind  legs  will  do  no  harm  as 
it  favors  propulsion.  For  saddle  use,  such  a  horse 
is  unfit,  as,  in  this  case,  the  fore  hand  is  naturally 
overburdened,  and  will  be  quickly  ruined.  Only  in 
exceptional  cases,  where  powerful  loins  permit  a 
transmission  of  the  burden  upon  the  stronger  hind 
hand,  the  condition  of  the  fore  legs  may  be  pre- 
served by  careful  riding.  Otherwise,  it  is  better  to 
select  for  saddle  use,  a  horse  with  less  speed,  but 
whose  fore  and  hind  hand  are  in  perfect  balance. 

The  incorrect  positions  of  the  fore  and  hind  legs, 
as  we  have  seen  before,  combine  in  their  relations  as 
follows : 

(1)  If  both  fore  and  hind  legs  are  placed  back- 
ward, the  animal  will  easily  lose  its  balance  for- 
ward, will  produce  much  pressure  forward,  but  will 
be  unsafe.  It  is  only  fit  for  draught,  and  will  ruin  its 
fore  legs. 

(2)  If  fore  and  hind  legs  are  placed  forward,  there 
will  be  but  little  propulsion.  It  will  be  a  moderate 
carriage  and  a  slow  saddle  horse. 

(3)  If  the  fore  legs  are  placed  backward  and  the 
hind  legs  forward,  that  is,  if  all  four  legs  are  under 


THE   SKELETON.  4? 

tlie  body  (produced  by  faulty  formation  of  the  angles 
but  also  occurring  with  hunchbacked  horses),  then 
the  animal  is  unsafe  as  a  saddle  horse,  has  not  the 
necessary  propelling  capability  for  a  harness  horse, 
and  will  "  forge." 

(4)  If  the  fore  legs  are  placed  forward  and  the 
hind  legs  backward  (produced  by  bad  formation  of 
the  angles,  but  also  by  considerable  swayback), 
then  the  animal,  whose  fore  and  hind  legs  seem  to 
act  separately,  is  entirely  unfit  for  saddle  use  and 
is  only  a  very  poor  harness  horse. 

THE  EXAMINATION  OF  THE  HORSE  FROM  THE  FRONT 
AND  FROM  BEHIND. 

Thus  far,  we  have  examined  the  horse  from  the 
side.  Let  us  scan  it  now  from  the  front  and  from 
behind.  As  difficult  as  it  is  to  express  in  numbers 
the  proportions  of  a  horse's  body,  so  difficult  is  it  to 
say  how  broad  a  horse  should  be  from  shoulder  point 
to  shoulder  point,  and  from  hip  to  hip.  The  limits 
for  greater  width  lie  in  the  growing  weight  of  the 
rump,  and  in  the  disadvantages  for  the  movements, 
as  we  will  see  later  on.  The  limits  of  the  narrow 
formation  are  fixed  by  the  insufficient  space  for  the 
chest  and  the  vital  organs  enclosed  therein,  destined 
for  respiration  and  circulation,  as  also  by  the  insuffi- 
cient   width    from    hip    to    hip,    thereby   offering 


48  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 

insufficient  play-room  for  the  muscles  of  the  hind- 
quarters to  the  special  disadvantage  of  the  motive 
power. 

Under  all  circumstances,  a  horse  should  be  equally 
broad  in  front  and  behind,  and  the  front  and  hind 
hoofs  should  stand  equally  apart.  In  motion  the 
legs  of  the  same  side  should  cover  each  other,  and 
move  parallel  and  at  equall  distances  from  an 
imaginary  plane  laid  vertically  through  the  spine. 

In  all  paces  there  is  a  more  or  less  swaying  motion 
of  the  body  from  side  to  side,  as  the  different  legs 
take  their  turn  in  supportiug  the  weight.  It  is  con- 
ceivable that,  in  slow  gaits,  especially  in  the  walk, 
these  swaying  motions  will  take  place  in  an  increased 
way,  and  also,  that  the  farther  the  legs  are  set 
apart,  the  farther  sideward  they  have  to  push  the 
burden,  so  that  by  great  width  of  the  frame,  the 
motion  of  the  animal  must  become  swaying  from 
side  to  side.  But,  through  these  swayings,  time  is 
lost  for  the  forward  movement,  therefore  speed  must 
suffer  by  great  width  of  frame.  On  the  other  side, 
the  broad  formation  causes  a  safe  basis,  and  the 
body  will  not  easily  lose  its  balance  sideways.  It 
affords  safety  in  the  turns  and  makes  it  easy  for  the 
animal  to  balance  its  own  and  the  rider's  weight  in 
the  stops  and  in  gallop. 

In  the  narrow  frame  these  deviations  to  the  right 


^HE  SKELETON.  49 

and  left  are  diminished,  but  tlie  roominess  of  tlie 
motion  is  increased.  Narrow  built  horses  are  easily 
thrown  off  their  balance,  and,  therefore,  offer  less 
safety  in  turning;  but  they  carry  the  turns  out 
shorter  and  easier  with  the  assistance  of  the  dis- 
placement of  the  weight  of  the  rider.  It  is  very 
difficult  for  such  horses  to  balance  tho  weight 
in  gallop  and  in  stopping. 

Deviations  from  the  normal  width  between  fore 
and  hind  hand  occur  in  the  following  combinations: 

(1)  Brooder  behind  than  in  front.  If  the  difference  is 
not  too  great,  it  has  the  advantage  that,  in  the  gallop 
and  in  stopping,  the  burden  is  supported  on  a  broad 
basis,  and  that,  in  running,  the  hind  legs  pass  by 
easily  on  the  outside  of  the  fore  legs  ;  but,  the  chest 
being  narrower,  the  saddle  will  slip  forward  on  such 
horses,  and  the  fore  legs  suffer  frequently  by 
their  not  balancing  the  weight  properly,  especially 
in  the  trot. 

(2)  Broader  in  front  than  behind.  Here  we  find, 
besides  the  already  mentioned  disadvantages  of  the 
narrow  formation,  the  very  serious  defect  that  the 
hind  legs  cannot  pass  by  the  fore  legs,  and  that,  in 
sharp  gaits,  injuries  to  the  latter  are  unavoidable. 
These  horses  are  not  fit  for  saddle  use. 

Sometimes  we  find  horses,  though  proportionately 
\>m\i  in  this  respect,  that  do  not  follow  with  their 


50  HOW  TO  JUDGE!  A  SORSfi. 

hind  legs  in  the  direction  of  the  fore  legs,  but  swerve 
with  both  hind  legs  to  one  side.  They  travel  like  a 
dog,  placing  the  axis  of  their  motion  diagonally  to  the 
line  of  travel.  The  cause  is  either  great  weakness 
or  pain  in  the  back.  But,  let  there  be  no  misappre- 
hension, many  horses,  from  pain  in  the  jaws,  do 
the  same  thing,  when  under  the  saddle,  but,  when 
led  by  hand,  go  straight. 

The  position  of  the  limbs,  seen  from  front  or  from 
behind,  should  be  perpendicular  throughout,  so  that 
the  hip  joint  of  the  hind  leg  stands  perpendicular 
over  the  basis  of  the  hind  hoof,  and,  the  elbow  joint 
of  the  fore  leg,  over  that  of  the  front  hoof.  The 
position  of  the  bones  of  the  fore  leg,  under  normal 
conditions,  must  form  a  straight  line  through  its 
entire  length. 

The  bones  of  a  well-formed  hind  leg,  looked  at 
from  behind,  show,  on  the  contrary,  an  angular 
course  interrupted  by  the  joints.  The  thigh  bone 
takes  in  its  course  downward  and  forward,  an 
outward  direction,  so  that  the  stifle  joint  falls 
sideways  and  outward  of  the  perpendicular  from  the 
hip  joint,  and  the  horse  appears  broader  in  the  stifle 
than  in  the  hip.  From  the  stifle  joint,  the  leg  bone 
runs  in  an  oblique  direction  downward  and  inward, 
and  connects  through  the  hock  joint  with  the  shank 
bone.     This  latter  stands  again  perpendicular,  and, 


THE   SKELETON.  51 

connecting  with  it,  the  pasterns.  It  is  apparent  that 
such  combination  of  the  bones  is  advantageous  for 
the  extending  ability  of  the  limb,  as  well  as  for  the 
development  of  powerful  muscles. 

In  the  hind  legs  we  find  the  following  deviations 
from  these  rules  : 

(1)  The  points  of  the  hock  joint  are  placed 
narrowly  together,  and  from  here  the  shanks  run 
down  in  an  oblique  and  outward  direction,  so  that  the 
hock,  as  also  the  pastern  (fetlock)  joints,  are  not 
perpendicular  over  the  basis  of  the  hoof.  The  cause 
for  this  position  is  generally  a  turn  of  the  whole  leg 
around  its  longitudinal  axis,  the  toe  of  the  hoof 
being  turned  outward.  The  angle  of  the  hock  joint 
is,  in  this  case,  generally  narrow,  and  the  formation 
of  the  leg  is  called  coiv-legged.  As  a  consequence  of 
the  great  extending  ability  of  the  bones,  we 
observe  in  this  formation,  generally,  a  very  roomy 
stride,  though  accompanied  by  an  unsightly  mowing 
motion  of  the  leg.  The  motive  power  is  likewise 
not  sufficient,  and,  if  the  blemish  is  very  pronounced, 
the  hock  joints  are  exposed  to  sprains  of  the 
ligaments. 

(2)  The  hind  hoofs  stand  closer  together  than  the 
hock  joints — the  so-called  hotv-legged  position.  The 
toes  are  mostly  turned  inward,  undergoiug  at  every 
step  of  the  leg,  a  still  greater  turn  inward,  at  the 


g2 


fiOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOBSii. 


Fig.  10a. 


^fiH  SKELETON.  53 

same  time  throwing  tlie  Lock  joints  outward.  Tliis 
formation  indicates  weakness  of  the  limb,  is  very 
unsightly  and  unsafe,  and  the  horse  will  interfer 
considerably. 

At  the /ore  legs,  we  notice  the  following  deviations 
from  the  perdendicular. 

(1)  The  hoofs  are  farther  apart  than  the  upper 
portions  of  the  leg.  The  deviation,  from  the  perpen- 
dicular, may  begin  at  the  elbow  joint,  or,  lower  down, 
at  the  knee  or  the  fetlock  joint.  If,  at  the  same  time, 
a  turn  of  the  whole  leg,  around  its  axis,  is  connected 
with  the  deviations,  and  the  toe  of  the  hoof  is  turned 
outward,  then  it  is  called  the  dancingmaster  position. 
Horses,  with  either  of  these  deviations,  show  an 
irregular  flourishing  motion  in  bringing  the  leg 
forward,  becoming  in  many  instances  the  cause  of 
interfering  at  the  fetlock  joints,  especially  if  the 
shoeing  is  not  properly  executed.  Light-built  and 
narrow-chested  blood  horses  frequently  show  this 
position,  but  without  any  disadvantages.  In  this 
case,  the  leg  must  show  the  deviation  from  the 
perpendicular,  only  from  the  fetlock  joint  down,  and 
to  a  small  degree. 

(2)  The  hoofs  stand  closer  together  than  the  width 
of  the  chest.  If,  at  the  sanie  time,  the  toe  of  the 
hoof,  or  the  whole  longitudinal  axis  of  the  leg,  is 
turned  inward,  the  danger  of  striking  is  greater  than 


64  EOW  TO   JUDGE   A   rORSE. 

in  tliG  former  formations,  and  tlie  disposition  to 
sprdins  and  lameness  in  tlie  lower  joints  is  aug- 
mented. 

HINTS   TO   THE   PURCHASER  OF   A   HORSE. 

Having  examined  tliose  qualities  of  the  horse, 
constituting  his  propelliiig.powers,  let  us  acquaint 
ourselves  now  with  some  advantages  and  resources 
for  the  jadging  of  the  whole  framework. 

One  of  the  first  rules,  in  judging  horses,  is  to  place 
the  horse  on  level  ground.  If  the  horse  is  placed  on 
an  incline,  with  legs  stretched,  it  appears  higher  in 
front,  the  shoulders  appear  more  oblique,  the  fore 
legs,  even  if  already  slightly  knee-sprung  and 
shaggy,  look  straight  and  safe;  the  back  and  the 
croup  of  the  horse  appear  horizontal,  the  space 
between  belly  and  ground  gets  smaller,  and  the 
distance  between  hind  and  front  hoofs  larger.  A 
general  comparison  of  the  pro^Dortions  must  be  the 
first  step.  A  perfectly,  regularly  built  horse  should 
not  make  the  impression  of  being  remarkably  tall 
nor  remarkably  small,  else,  there  are  in  both  cases, 
certain  disproportions.  A  horse,  appearing  very 
tall,  is  generally  long-legged  and  narrow-chested, 
while  a  horse,  looking  ^ery  small,  is  generally  too 
long-bodied. 

The  shape  and  size  of  the  head  is  in  itself  very 


THE  SKELETON.  65 

immaterial,  and  only  of  importance  for  the  recogni- 
tion of  the  breed,  or  the  character  of  the  animal, 
but,  on  the  other  hand,  fancy,  or  the  reigning  style, 
is  entirely  decisive,  viz :  considering  at  times  a 
very  small  head,  at  other  times  a  big  head  and  a 
Eoman  nose  as  the  prettiest.  A  big  head  is  certainly 
not  beautiful,  but  does  by  no  means  diminish  the 
usefulness  of  the  horse.  If  supported  by  a  well 
set-up  neck  and  powerful  neck  muscles,  it  will  not 
fall  so  heavy  upon  the  hand,  as  is  generally  believed. 

With  the  neck  it  is  different ;  set-up  low  on  a 
straight  shoulder,  it  will  be  carried  low  and  flabby, 
and  together  with  the  head  will  overburden  the 
fore  hand.  Especially,  for  the  saddle-horse,  is  the 
formation  and  connection  of  the  neck  of  deciding 
importance,  and  many  an  honest  horse  has  been 
ruined  by  ignorant  horse-breakers  on  account  of 
insurmountable  difficulties  of  the  neck. 

An  old  custom,  to  draw  conclusions  on  the  quali- 
ties of  a  horse  from  the  sharpness  and  firmness  of 
the  crest,  may  be  mentioned  here.  The  thickness 
of  the  fat  layer,  on  which  the  sharpness  of  the  crest 
principally  depends,  justifies  a  conclusion  on  the 
more  or  less  firm  texture  of  the  other  formations  of 
the  body.  Firm  textures  is  the  inheritance  of 
the  nobler  breeds.  They  also  possess  the  dry, 
firm  crest,  the  thin  skin  exhibiting  the  veins  and 


56  HOW  TO   JUDGE   A   HORSE. 

stretching  itself  tight  over  the  extremities,  and  the 
thin,  soft  hair  of  the  mane  and  tail.  Spongy 
and  flabby  forms,  and  an  exuberant  and  heavy 
growth  of  hair  are  signs  of  the  common  breeds, 
which  horse  dealers  try  to  cover  defects  by 
shearhing  the  fetlocks  and  throat,  by  pulling  the 
mane  and  tail,  by  clipping,  etc. 

Another  custom,  having  also  some  justification,  is 
that  of  lifting  the  tail.  An  energetic  horse  dislikes 
all  experimenting  about  his  body,  and,  therefore,  a 
strong  resistance  from  the  horse  against  the  lifting 
of  his  tail  may  be  conclusive  of  the  power  of  the  back. 

For  the  judging  of  the  chief  proportions  we  will 
be  materially  assisted  by  some  lines.  (See  Fig.  14, 
Skeleton  of  the  Horse.) 

(1)  Draw  a  horizontal  line  through  the  withers 
over  the  highest  point  of  the  croup ; 

(2)  A  line  from  the  upper  part  of  the  elbow  to  the 
lower  part  of  the  stifle  ; 

(3)  Drop  a  line  from  the  shoulder  point  to  the 
ground,  and  extend  the  same  upward  to  line  1 ; 

(4)  Drop  a  line  from  the  point  of  the  ischium 
bone  and  extend  upward  to  line  1. 

Line  1  serves  to  judge  whether  fore  and  hind  hand 
are  equal  in  height ;  line  3  shows  whether  the  fore 
legs,  and  line  4  shows  whether  the  hind  legs  are  cor- 
rectly placed  under  the  body. 


THE  SKELETON. 


&r 


Lines  1,  3,  4  and  the  ground  form  a  square,  divid- 
ed by  line  2  in  two  almost  equally  liigli  rectangles. 
The  upper,  somewhat  smaller  one,  containing  the 
rump,  the  lower  one  the  extremities. 

The  depth  of  the  rump,  from  the  spinal  column  to 
the  breastbone,  decides  the  dimensions  of  the  chest. 
This  depth  corresponds  with  the  arch  of  the  human 
chest,  and,  like  that  arch,  being  far  more  im- 
portant for  the  free  expansion  of  the  lungs, 
than  the  width  from  shoulder  to  shoulder,  so  also 
has  the  depth  of  the  chest  of  the  horse  more 
influence  on  the  expansibility  of  the  lungs,  than  the 
width  of  the  chest  looked  at  from  the  front.  For 
the  saddle-horse,  in  particular,  does  great  depth  of 
the  chest  warrant  a  good  position  for  the  saddle. 
The  height  of  the  upper  rectangle  finally  decides  the 
longitudinal  proportions  of  shoulder  and  armbone, 
haunch  and  thigh  bone,  recognized  so  very  important 
for  free  actions. 

The  lower  rectangle  decides  the  relation  of  the 
length  of  the  legs  to  their  distance  from  each  other. 
We  have  seen  how  important  it  is  that  the  legs 
should  cover  much  ground  in  motion.  To  accom- 
plish this,  they  need  sufficient  room,  and,  they  can 
only  find  this,  if  the  length  of  the  rectangle  is  nearly 
twice  that  of  its  height.  The  more  this  figure  re- 
sembles a  square,  the  less  will  the  animal  be  enabled 


58  HOW  TO   JUDGE   A   HORSE. 

to  place  its  hind  legs  under  tlie  body,  or  to  hold  out 
long  backward  with  its  fore  legs,  without  the  legs 
being  in  the  way  of  each  other.  Horses,  of  this 
build,  are  called  long-legged,  and,  are  neither  fast 
nor  enduring. 

To  judge  the  obliqueness  and  horizontal  exten- 
sion of  the  croup  and  shoulder,  and  their  relation 
to  each  other,  especially  to  the  back,  we  drop  : 

5,  a  line  from  the  posterior  edge  of  the  shoulder 
and 

6,  a  line  from  the  hip  to  the  ground. 

That  divides  line  1  in  three  parts.  The  first  part 
shows  the  length  of  the  shoulder,  the  middle 
part  that  of  the  back,  and  the  third  part  that  of  the 
group.  The  first  and  third  part  can  never  be  too  long, 
and  the  second  part  never  be  too  short.  By  good 
proportions,  these  three  parts  in  their  succession, 
from  front  to  rear,  will  be  in  the  ratio  of  7,  8,  9.  The 
space  between  fore  and  hind  legs  cannot  be  too  large, 
and  the  horse  cannot  be  too  long,  providing  the 
positions  of  the  legs  are  correct,  and  the  length  of 
the  horse  is  not  brought  about  by  a  long  back,  but 
by  the  length  of  the  shoulderpiece  and  that  of 
the  croup.  "Short  back  and  long  horse"  is  the 
demand. 

After  having  examined  the  horse  from  the  side, 
inspect  it  also  from  the  front  and  rear,  paying  atten- 


THE  SKELETON.  ^§ 

tion  to  the  proportion  of  its  width  in  the  hips  and 
the  shoulders,  to  the  perpendicular  position  of  the 
limbs,  and  to  any  deviations  mentioned  before. 
After  this  examination  has  been  satisfactory,  then 
examine  the  horse  also  in  motion.  Whips  must 
disappear,  exciting  calls  and  noise  must  cease,  and 
the  man  leading  the  horse  be  warned  from  jerking 
the  horse  under  the  chin.  If  we  notice,  that  by  such 
practices,  the  regularity  of  the  paces,  especially  that 
of  the  trot,  is  frequently  and  purposely  interrupted, 
then  we  have  to  look  out  for  hidden  lamenesses. 
Light,  easy  and  measured  action,  are  signs  of 
harmonious  strength,  cannot  be  valued  enough,  and 
should  not  be  sacrificed  for  the  prominent  action  of 
one  siugle  part.  The  roominess  of  the  paces  is 
discerned  by  observing  the  hind  legs,  the  safety, 
by  the  action  of  the  fore  legs.  The  carrying 
power  of  the  back,  and  the  elasticity  of  the  hock  and 
pastern  joints,  are  better  judged  under  the  rider, 
as,  in  general,  we  obtain  a  far  better  and  correct 
judgment  of  the  power  and  elasticity  of  the  muscles 
and  sinews,  by  mounting  the  horse  ourselves. 

While  riding  the  horse,  we  have  an  opportunity  to 
examine  the  condition  of  its  lungs  or  the  ivind  as  it 
is  generally  called.  The  wind  is  subject  to  many 
modifications.  As  it  is  a  poiut  of  great  impor- 
tance, in  regard  to  usefulness,  any  horse,  with  the 


60  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORgg. 

slightest  imperfection  of  his  lungs,  should  be  at 
once  rejected.  There  are  several  degrees  of  damaged 
lungs,  viz  :  tliiclc  ivind,  roaring,  ivJieezing  and  ivMstlingf 
all  of  which  degenerate  finally  into  broken  wind 
and  arise  from  disease  or  obstruction  of  some  of  the 
air  passages  of  the  lungs,  the  windpipe,  bronchial 
tubes  or  nostrils.  Such  diseased  horses  cannot  be 
cured,  on  the  contrary  they  grow  worse  day  by  day, 
even  by  moderate  work,  until  the  horse  is  totally 
wind-broken  and  useless. 

Thick  luind  arises  from  insufficient  space  for  the 
expansion  of  the  lungs,  or,  for  the  expiration  of  the 
air  through  the  bronchial  tubes,  owing  to  the  thick- 
ening of  the  mucous  lining  in  consequence  of  former 
inflammation.  It  is  detected  by  the  laborious 
breathing  which  often  extends  almost  to  suffocation 
and  generally  ends  in  broken  wind. 

Roaring  is  a  minor  degree  of  thick  wind,  originat- 
ing from  thickening  of  a  portion  of  the  mucous 
membrane  within  the  windpipe,  producing  a  con- 
traction of  the  same,  thereby  preventing  the  freo 
expiration  of  the  breath.  It  is  detected  by  the 
exertion  which  causes  the  horse  to  expel  the  air 
producing  a  loud  puffing  or  roaring  sound — the  in- 
spiration is  noisless.  It  shows  itself  during  excite- 
ment or  sudden  motion. 

Wheezing  is    a  modification    of    roaring,    differ- 


THE   SKELETON.  61 

ing  from  the  latter,  in  that  it  can  be  noticed  even 
if  the  animal  is  completely  at  rest  and  in  the 
stable,  it  originates  from  the  lodgment  of  mucous 
matter  in  the  bronchical  tubes. 

Whistling  is  also  a  modification  of  roaring  and 
differs  from  the  same  in  that  it  does  not  appear 
after  excitement  or  sudden  motion,  only  after 
lasting  motion,  and  the  noise  it  produces  is  more 
shrill.    It  originates  from  contraction  of  the  larynx. 

Broken  Wind  originates  from  rapture  of  some  of 
the  aircells  of  the  lungs,  the  inspiration  being  ef- 
fected readily  by  a  single  effort  as  usual,  but  the 
expiration  requiring  a  double,  and  in  very  bad 
cases,  even  several  efforts  to  expel  the  breath. 
"When  the  horse  is  at  work,  this  disease  cannot  be 
mistaken.  A  loud  sobbing  breath  and  the  labor- 
ious heaving  and  jerking  collapse  of  the  flanks  in- 
dicate this  defect.  It  is  accompanied  by  a  hard  and 
husky  cough.     This  disease  can  never  be  cured. 

Horses,  having  any  of  these  diseases  become 
speedily  exhausted  by  work  and  are  absolutely  un- 
sound. There  are  various  ways  to  detect  these 
defects.  The  usual  way  is  to  grasp  the  horse's 
throat  from  the  front  near  the  mouth  of  the  larynx, 
compress  the  same  forcibly  so  as  to  cause  him 
to  cough.  A  sound  horse  will  cough  but  once  and 
recover    his    breath  with    a  clear   deep    inhalation 


62  now  TO  juDGi:  a  hobse. 

and  exlialatioD,  wliile,  in  a  diseased  liorse,  we  liear 
a  broken  rattling  cough,  the  wind  being  recovered 
bj  a  long  laborious  and  wheezing  effort.  This 
sign  is  decisive  and  the  degree  of  labor  will  show 
the  more  or  less  advanced  degree  of  the  disease. 

A  roarer  can  easily  be  detected  in  the  stable,  as 
well  as  on  the  road,  by  the  distressing  sound  he 
produces.  Step  into  the  stall  of  a  roarer  and  ad- 
minister an  unexpected  sharp  blow  on  the  belly. 
A  loud  grunt  will  explain  his  condition.  Under 
the  saddle  give  him  a  long  sharp  galloj),  pull  him 
tip  suddenly  and  listen  while  you  incline  forward 
and  downward,  bringing  your  ear  close  to  the 
windpipe,  or  dismount  quickly  and  put  your  ear 
close  to  the  neck  near  the  head.  You  will  hear 
the  whistling  sound  for  some  seconds  and  even 
minutes.  In  this  way  you  may  detect  the  disease 
in  its  smallest  and  most  incipient  stage. 

The  examination  of  the  eyes  is  most  difficult 
and  should  better  not  be  undertaken  by  the  pur- 
chaser, but  by  an  experienced  veterinary  surgeon. 

A  very  important — in  fact  a  deciding  point — in 
regard  to  the  usefulness  of  a  saddle  or  carriage 
horse,  is  the  conformation  of  Ms  jaivs,  which  should 
never  be  neglected  in  examining  a  horse.  Every- 
thing satisfactory,  but  this  part,  the  horse  should 
be   rejected    as   unfit  for  the  purpose.     The  jaws 


THE  SKELETON.  63 

should  be  diverging  so  as  to  make  room  for  the 
throat. 

We  all  wish  our  horse  to  look  as  stylish  as  pos- 
sible, the  same  time  we  want  him  to  be  light  in 
hand.  This  can  only  be  the  case  if  the  horse  is  able 
to  arch  his  neck ;  consequently  there  must  be  the 
necessary  space  for  the  throat  to  slip  in  between 
the  jaws. 

A  horse  with  ixirallel  or  converging  jaws,  will  never 
be  able,  in  spite  of  all  bitting  bridles,  to  give  in  his 
nose,  as,  in  trying  to  do  so,  the  edges  of  the  jawbones 
press  against  the  neck,  squeezing  in  the  glands 
and  causiDg  the  horse  intolerable  pain.  These 
glands  are  situated  just  under  and  inside  of  those 
edges,  and,  if  cramped  in,  the  free  circulation  of  the 
blood  is  stopped,  and,  as  they  are  also  in  connection 
with  the  eyes,  such  pressure  frequently  causes  a 
rush  of  blood  to  the  eyes  or  to  the  brain,  followed 
by  the  horse  running  away,  rearing,  plungiug,  boriug 
on  the  hand,  etc.  Many  an  accident  could  be  traced 
back  to  such  malformation.  Thoroughbreds  show 
this  conformation  very  frequently,  but,  as  in  run- 
ning, they  are  allowed  to  stretch  their  neck,  it  does 
not  matter. 

Adding  to  this  malformation,  a  tight  buckled 
throatlash,  as  we  almost  invariably  find  with 
saddle,  as  well  as  with  carriage  horses,  it  is  simply 


64  HOW  TO  JU1)G£  A  flOBSS!. 

astonishing  that  no  more  accidents  happen.  It  is 
the  utmost  cruelty  to  the  poor  animal,  to  force  his 
head  by  means  of  the  reins  into  a  position,  which 
nature  or  a  tight  throatlash  renders  impossible  to 
assume.  Many  of  those  artists,  calling  themselves 
saddle-horse  trainers  are  in  blissful  ignorance  of 
this  fact.  They  kick  and  jerk  the  horse  in  all 
directions  without  the  coveted  result, — that  is,  secur- 
ing the  nose  and  thereby  the  lightness  in  hand. 

In  almost  every  private  stable  we  can  see  a  horse 
in  a  boxstall  with  a  bitting  rig  on,  and  the  poor 
creature  vainly  torturing  itself,  tryiiig  to  put  its 
neck,  under  the  circumstances,  in  an  impossible 
position.  This  speaks  volumes  of  the  utter  ignorance 
of  many  of  those  in  charge  of  horses.  They  should 
tie  out  the  horse,  first  only  lightly  on  one  side, 
buckling  the  other  rein  just  so  much  looser  for 
the  purpose  of  keeping  the  neck  straight,  thereby 
giving  the  horse  a  chance  to  flex  this  side  gradually 
and,  then,  after  fifteen  minutes  change  sides. 
One  hour's  exercise  at  a  time  is  sufficient. 
Continue  this  until  the  glands,  which  come  out 
strong,  disappear  gradually  under  the  jaw.  In  this 
manner,  the  horse  would,  after  a  time,  be  able  to 
flex  both  jaws  together  ;  but  we  generally  see  both 
reins  tied  as  short  as  possible  from  beginning,  no 
matter  what  agonies  the  horse  suffers.    If,  under 


THE  SKELETON.  65 

this  pain,  the  horse  gets  restless,  rears  up  and 
throws  himself  over,  these  individuals  are  utterly 
astonished  and  even  quite  indignant  at  the  vicious- 
ness  of  that  beast,  and  many  are  the  blows  he 
receives  in  the  bargain.  As  long  as  horse- owners 
do  not  take  more  interest  in  their  horses  it  is  to  be 
feared  that  such  contemptible  practices  will  not  be 
stopped. 

The  best  way  is,  never  to  buy,  for  saddle  or 
harness  use,  a  horse  whose  jaws  are  not  diverging, 

A  few  words  about  the  ^'flying  step,''  formerly  so 
much  favored.  If,  at  a  sharp  trot,  the  fore  leg  is 
extended  fully,  the  hoof  pauses  for  a  moment 
entirely,  floating  in  the  air,  as  it  were,  so  that, 
observed  from  front,  the  sole  of  the  hoof  can  be 
seen.  The  pausing  of  the  hoof  marks  the  moment 
when  the  propelling  power  of  the  hind  leg  comes  to 
a  premature  end,  being  no  longer  able  to  throw 
the  body  to  that  place,  where  the  hoof  points.  It 
forces  the  animal  instead  of  carrying  out  the  step  to 
its  full  length,  to  draw  the  leg  back.  The  flying 
step  is,  therefore,  a  useless  waste  of  power,  affecting 
muscles  and  sinews  in  a  high  degree.  Experience 
shows  that  these  horses  cover  very  little  ground. 

Just  as  ruinous  is  the  "  Jiigh  knee  action^'  so  much 
in  favor  at  present,  and  almost  the  sole  considera- 
tion for  the  valuation  of  a  carriage-horse.     It  is  the 


66 


HOW   TO   .UDGE   A   HOESE. 


same  useless  waste  of  power,  affecting,  not  only 
muscles  and  sinews,  but  also  attacking  tlie  joints 
considerably.  Such  horses  also  cover  very  little 
ground.  The  high  knee  action  originates  from  too 
great  length  of  the  cannonbone  in  comparison  to 
the  length  of  the  fore  arm,  and  has  nothing  in 
common  with  the  really  beautiful  high  step-out  of 
the  shoulder,  which,  being  supported  by  an 
energetic  motis^e  power  of  the  hindquarters,  will 
do  its  best  for  the  safety  and  roominess  of  the 
action. 

Finally,  we  have  to  view  the  movements  from 
front  and  from  behind  and  to  observe,  whether  the 
legs  cover  each  other  and  are  brought  forward  in  a 
straight  direction. 

The  examination  of  the  hoof  is  of  the  utmost 
importance,  but  it  is  beyond  the  limit  of  this  little 
treatise  to  go  into  details.  Bo  it  said  only  that  it  is 
the  more  important  to  look  for  a  sound  hoof,  if  the 
horse  is  to  be  used  on  hard  pavement.  A  brittle,  a 
flat  or  a  contracted  hoof,  in  this  case,  disqualifies 
an  otherwise  good  and  serviceable  horse. 

It  is  likewise  impossible  to  discuss  the  numerous 
blemishes  on  the  joints,  bones,  etc.  If  in 
consequence  of  irregularities  in  the  structure, 
defects  on  the  limbs  have  made  their  appearance, 
and  in  such  places,  which  apparently  in  consequence 


THE   SKELETON.  6T 

of  those  irregularities,  liave  to  sustain  increased 
strain  and  are  therefore  most  exposed  to  ruin,  then 
there  is  a  disposition  to  that  defect.  In  this  case, 
we  may  call  it  a  necessary  defect.  On  the  other  side, 
blemishes  not  resulting  from  the  structure,  but 
brought  about  by  casual  injury,  by  overburdening 
or  false  distribution  of  the  weight  on  the  part  of 
the  rider,  we  may  designate  as  casual  defects. 

If  a  horse,  whose  weak  fore  legs  succumbed  un- 
der the  throng  of  a  superior  hindhand,  shows  en- 
largement of  the  tendons,  galls,  or  crooked  knees, 
then  such  blemishes  will  be  necessary  ones.  If  we 
find  the  same  blemishes  on  a  favorably  built  fore- 
hand, and  which  is  perhaps  superior  to  the  hind- 
hand,  we  may  consider  them  as  the  results  of  casual 
events  or  brought  about  by  a  bad  rider.  They 
may  not  reappear  in  future.  We  see  how  differently 
we  have  to  judge  the  same  blemish  on  two  different 
horses,  how  erroneous  it  is  to  regard  every  defect 
as  serious  and  to  ipsist  on  buying  only  a  horse  free 
of  any  blemish. 

The  greatest  skill,  in  judging  horses,  consists  in 
letting  pass  a  blemish  at  the  right  time.  Never 
scruple  about  casual  defects,  not  rendering  the 
animal  unserviceable,  but  take  good  care  never  to 
buy  a  horse  affected  with  a  necessary  defect,  even  if 
ever   so   little  developed.     Examine    carefully    the 


68  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A   HORSE. 

weak  parts  for  thickening  of  the  skin,  white  hairs 
or  a  scar,  indicating  blistering  or  the  hot  iron. 
Finding  the  least  thing,  the  proof  is  established  that 
the  respective  part  has  succumbed  under  the  exer- 
tion, and  that  the  next  exertion  will  result  in  the 
reappearance  of  the  cured  blemish. 

The  great  advantage  to  the  dealer,  in  selling 
green  and  young  horses,  is  that  work  has  not 
marked  as  yet  the  defective  and  weak  parts  with 
blemishes   on   the   bones. 

When  the  number  of  connoisseurs  has  so  much 
increased  that  a  four-year-old,  clean-legged  horse 
of  faulty  structure,  would  bring  a  far  inferior  price 
than  an  eight-year-old  of  good  formation,  even  if 
affected  with  some  casual  blemishes,  (a  natural 
result  of  work);  only  then,  when  the  breeder  would 
find  it  impossible  to  dispose  of  those  worthless 
creatures  which  are  ruined  after  a  two  years  use, 
and,  if  this  sort  would  no  longer  pay  the  cost  of 
rearing  them,  then  such  mares  would  no  longer  be 
used  for  breeding  purposes,  which  being  cripples 
themselves  can  bear  nothing  but  cripples,  and  no 
stallions  would  be  employed  whose  faulty  and  com- 
mon structure  must  spoil  the  following  generations. 


DESCKIPTION     OF     THE    MOST    COMMON 
BLEMISHES   ON  THE  LEGS. 

BLEMISHES  ON   THE   FOKE   LEGS.      Fig.  11. 

Sj)Unts  (a)  are  bony  tumors  found  on  the  inner 
splintbone,  running  down  on  the  inner  side  of  the 
cannonbone  and  are  occasioned  by  violent  blows  or 
other  injuries,  sometimes  causing  lameness,  if  so 
close  to  the  knee  as  to  interfere  with  the  action  of 
that  joint,  or,  so  far  back  as  to  touch  the  back 
sinews.  If  located  on  the  middle  of  the  bone  they 
are  of  no  consequence.  They  will  generally  yield  to 
blistering  or  puncturing.  The  tendency  to  splint  is 
greatly  increased  by  the  practice  of  some  black- 
smiths of  raising  the  outer  heel  of  the  shoe  con- 
siderably, thereby  throwing  the  weight  of  the  horse 
more  on  the  inner  splintbone. 

Tied  in  helow  the  knee  (h)  is  a  serious  defect,  inter- 
fering with  endurance  and  speed.  Such  horses 
are  not  fit  for  fast  or  long  work  as  the  result  would 
be  a  serious  sprain  of  the  back  sinews.  The  leg  is 
insufficient  in  depth  right  under  the  knee. 

Sprain  of  the  Back  Sineics  (c)  is  an  iDflammation  of 
the  sheath  of  the  back  sinews,  the  result  of  wrench 


70 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOKSE. 


or  spraiD,  overwork  or  sudden  and  violent  exertions. 
If  the  inflammation  is  very  great,  tlie  liorse  suffers 
considerable  pain  and  will  be  very  lame.  Back 
sinews,  that  have  once  yielded,  can  never  again  ho 
depended  upon.  They  are  a  serious  defect  and  a 
sufficient  obstacle  against  buying. 


Sea^VoF  Cov-r^5 


Cov\frActec\  F<?er 


FIG.  11. 
WindgaUs  (d)  occur  on  both  fore  and  hind  legs 
and  are  puffy  enlargements  near  the  fetlock,  caused 


THE   SKELETON.  71 

bj  contiuued  liarcl  work,  especially  under  tlie  sad- 
dle, or  by  violent  actions  and  straining  of  the  sinews. 
They  are  not  serious  defects  as  they  seldom  produce 
lameness. 

Sidehones  (e)  are  bony  tumors  on  both  sides  of  the 
lower  pastern  bone,  ju>.t  above  the  hoof,  producing 
lameness,  and  are  incurable.  They  are  easily  detect- 
ed by  passing  the  hand  carefully  over  the  part. 
They  generally  spread  rapidly  around  the  foot,  form- 
ing a  complete  ring,  and  are  then  called  ringbones. 
They  cause  serious  lameness  and  are  signs  of 
positive  unsoundDess. 

Mdllenders  (/)  are  scurfy  eruptions  in  the  bent  of 
the  knees.  A  discharge  proceeds  from  them  which 
must  be  taken  care  of  at  the  start,  as  it  is  afterward 
very  difficult  to  stop.  They  seldom  produce  lame- 
ness, but  indicate  bad  stable  management. 

Quarter  crack  (g)  is  a  separation  cf  the  hornwall 
of  the  hoof  from  the  coronet  down  to  the  sole  and 
occurs  on  the  inner  side  of  the  front  hoof  only.  It 
is  produced  sometimes  by  violent  actions  on  hard 
roads,  especially  if  the  nails  are  driven  too  tight,  or 
the  shoe  is  left  too  long  on  the  hoof,  in  both  cases 
preventing  the  expansion  of  the  hoof.  A  burst 
of  the  wall  must  occur  on  the  top  of  the  hoof,  or, 
it  may  occur  in  hot  weather  when  the  hoof  becomes 
dry  and  hard  and  stopping  the  feet  is   neglected, 


72  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

which  ought  to  be  clone  twice  or  three  times  every 
week,  but  should  be  carefully  removed  before  the 
horse  goes  to  work,  or,  if  the  horn  is  naturally 
brittle.  If  the  crack  is  only  partial,  it  generally 
produces  no  lameness,  but,  if  it  extends  all  the  way 
down  to  the  sole,  the  cise  becomes  serious.  It 
takes  a  long  time  to  grow  down  again,  and  the 
animal  should  not  be  used  on  hard  ground.  The 
horse  should  be  shod  in  such  a  way  that  the  injured 
part  does  not  rest  on  the  shoe  so  as  to  prevent 
pressure. 

Corns  are  found  on  the  sole  of  the  front  hoofs, 
in  the  inner  angle  formed  by  the  crust  of  the  hoof 
and  the  bar,  and  are  caused  by  contracted  feet,  or 
by  x^ressure  of  the  shoe,  or  by  gravel  lodged  under 
the  shoe.  They  are  signs  of  neglect  either  from 
not  removing  the  gravel  or  stone  as  soon  as  the 
horse  returns  to  the  stable,  or  from  bad  shoeing. 
They  produce  sometimes  considerable  lameness. 
Such  horses  are  unsafe  and  should  be  rejected. 

Flat  Hoofs.  The  sole,  instead  of  forming  an  arch 
■upward,  as  in  a  sound  hoof,  is  perfectly  level  with 
the  ground.  If  the  sole  is  strong,  the  horse  may 
perform  his  work  well  enough  on  smooth  ground, 
but,  on  uneven,  stony  roads,  they  suffer  great  pain 
and  are  absolutely  unsafe.  They  frequently  degen- 
erate into  full  liorf.     The  sole   descends  below  the 


^m  SKELETOIT.  ?3 

walls  of  the  hoof.  Sucli  horses  are  unfit  for  any- 
work,  as  the  sole  becomes  very  thin,  causing  the 
animal  great  pain  at  step.  Such  poor  sufferers 
ought  to  be  shot  for  mercy's  sake. 

Contracted  Feet.  While  the  sole  of  the  sound 
front  hoof  has  a  somewhat  round  shape,  the  con- 
tracted hoof  has  shrunken,  presenting  an  irregular 
oval  shape  narrowed  in  at  the  heels,  the  inner  wall 
of  the  hoof  looking  as  if  crushed  in.  It  is  produced 
by  inflammation,  arising  from  various  causes,  but,  in 
most  cases,  by  bad  shoeing.  The  frog  becomes  nar- 
row and  hard  and  has  an  unhealthy  appearance. 
Contracted  feet  produce  corns  and  frequently  con- 
siderable lameness. 


BLEMISHES  ON  THE  HIND  LEGS. 
Fig.  12. 

TJiorough  2)in  (a)  is  an  escape  of  the  synovial  fluid 
in  the  form  of  a  swelling  between  the  bones  of  the 
hock  joint,  above  or  below  the  hock,  running  across, 
and  in  front  of  the  joint  from  side  to  side,  but  is 
seldom  attended  by  lameness.  It  resembles  hog  and 
hloodspavin  (e),  which  are  located  at  the  lower  and 
anterior  part  of  the  hock  joint.  Thej  are  frequently 
found  together,  seldom  causing  lameness,  but  chiefly 
weakness  and  stiffness  of  the  hock  joint.  The  horse 
is  able  to  perform  ordinary  work,  bub  is  unfit  for 
hard  and  fast  work,  as  the  joint  itself  is  affected. 

Capped  Hock  (b)  is  a  swelling  of  the  point  of  the 
hock  in  the  form  of  a  soft  fluctuant  tumor,  and  is 
produced  through  bruises  by  blows,  or  kicking  in 
harness,  or  in  the  stall,  or,  by  lying  on  a  thin  bed  or 
on  the  bare  floor.  It  is  seldom  accompanied  by 
lameness,  is  very  unsightly  though  easily  removed. 

Curh  id)  is  an  enlargement  at  the  posterior  side 
of  the  hock,  about  four  fingers  below  its  point, 
and  is  produced  by  sudden  and  violent  action  of  the 
limb.  For  instance,  after  an  extraordinary  leap,  a 
sharp  gallop  over  heavy  ground,  or  a  severe  and  sud- 


THE  SKELETON. 


75 


den  check  from  a  gallop,  cow-liocked  horses  are 
particularly  liable  to  it.  Aiter  tlieir  first  appearance, 
they  generally  produce  considerable  lameness. 


Cuz-i^        ,^^S 


FIG.  12. 

CoW'Jiocked  means,  if  the  hocks  stand  narrower 
together  than  the  hoofs,  the  lower  legs  and  the  toes 
are  turned  outward.     A  slight  inclination  to  this 


76  now   TO   JUEGE   A   IIOESfi. 

shape,  in  an  otL.erwi-e  powerfully  bnilt  horse,  is  not 
objectionable  ;  but,  in  a  horse  decidedly  cow-hocked, 
the  weight  is  thrown  too  much  on  the  inside  of  the 
hock,  producing  curb,  spavin,  and  enlargement  of  the 
hock,  generally  attended  by  great  lameness. 

Bone-spavin  (c)  is  a  bony  tumor  on  the  lower  and 
anterior  inner  part  of  the  hockjoint,  and  is  discern- 
ible by  looking,  from  front,  backward.  It  may  pro- 
duce total  lameness,  or  only  a  severe  lameness,  at  first 
starting,  which  may  in  time  subside  or  disappear, 
according  to  the  degree  in  which  the  bony  excres- 
cence interferes  with  the  motion  of  the  joint.  Many 
a  spavined  hunter  stands  his  work  without  lameness. 
Other  horses,  again,  merely  show  a  stiffness  at  first 
starting,  which  disappears  as  soon  as  the  horse  gets 
warmed  up,  while  others,  with,  perhaps,  a  very  small 
bony  tumor,  are  so  desperately  lame  as  to  destroy 
their  usefulness.  Spavined  horses  are  not  fit  for 
fast  or  regular  work,  as  this  lameness,  producing 
great  pain  in  rising,  prevents  many  horses  from 
lying  down ;  and  a  horse  that  cannot  rest,  cannot 
work.  Blacksmiths  frequently  increase  the  tendency 
to  spavin  by  raising  the  outer  heel  higher  than  the 
inner,  with  the  object  of  preventing  interference. 

Sallenders  are  a  similar  eruption  as  Mallenders^ 
and  are  located  at  the  anterior  bend  of  the  hock  or 
a  little  below  it. 


THE  SKELETOII.  ft 

Scratches  first  appear  as  a  dry  and  scaly  state  of 
the  skin  of  the  heels,  combined  with  redness,  heat 
and  itching,  and  should  be  attended  to  as  soon  as 
they  make  their  appearance,  because,  if  neglected, 
the  heels  begin  to  swell  and  crack  open,  emitting  a 
thin  glairy  and  very  offensive  discharge.  They  are  a 
sign  of  bad  stable  management,  through  leaving  the 
feet  and  heels  wet  after  work  on  muddy  roads  and 
exposed  to  a  cold  draft.  Sometimes  they  are  caused 
by  impure  blood  after  sickness. 


THE  AGE  OF  THE  HOESE. 
Fig.   13. 

To  cover  every  case,  it  is  almost  impossible  to  put 
down  invariable  rules  for  telling  the  age  of  a 
horse.  There  are  exceptions,  as  for  instance  :  a 
crih-liter  will  wear  his  teeth  off  faster  than  by  the 
natural  course,  which  is  about  i  to  i  of  an  inch  per 
year ;  or  of  a  thorough-bred  horse,  the  strong  struct- 
ure generally  makes  the  teeth  also  stronger  than 
those  of  a  horse  of  a  common  breed  of  the  same 
age,  causing  the  horse  to  appear  younger  than  he 
actually  is. 

Horses  change  their  first  set  of  teeth,  called  the 
milk  teethy  between  the  second  and  fifth  year,  for  the 
second  set,  called  the  permane7it  teeth.  During  the 
first  period  of  its  life,  up  to  five  years  old,  the  animal 
is  called  a  colt.  The  second  period  comprises  the  time 
from  five  years  upward,  when  the  animal  has  its 
permanent  set  of  teeth.  From  this  age  it  is  called 
a  ho7'se. 

The  milk  teeth  are  different  in  shape  from  the 
permanent  teeth,  showing  a  well  set-off  body  and 
neck,  and,  on  their  front  surfaces,  grooves  which  dis- 
appear from  the  centre  nippers  at  the  age  of  one 


THE  AGE  OF  THE   HORSE.  79 

year,  from  the  next  pair  at  the  age  of  two  years,  and 
from  the  corner  nippers  at  the  age  of  three  years. 
The  milk-teeth  are  replaced  by  the  permanent  teeth 
in  the  following  order  : 

(1)  One  to  two  weeks  after  birth  the  first  two  teeth 
(centre  nippers)  of  the  set  of  milk  teeth  appear  in 
lower  and  upper  jaw,  (Fig.  13-1)  which,  at  the  age  of 
two  years,  become  loose  and  fall  out,  and  in  their 
places  appear  permanent  teeth  (No.  4)  with  deep 
cavities  or  marks  and  sharp  edges. 

(2)  About  six  weeks  after  birth,  appear  the  next 
pair  of  milk  teeth  in  both  jaws,  (No.  2),  which  fall 
out  with  three  years  old,  and  permanent  teeth  grow 
up  in  their  place,  (No.  5). 

(3)  About  eight  months  old,  the  last  milk  teeth, 
the  corner  nippers  appear,  (No.  3)  wliich  fall  out  at 
the  age  of  four  years,  and  the  last  permanent  teeth 
make  their  appearance,  (No.  6)  so  that  with  five 
years  old,  the  teeth  are  all  in  line  and  the  horse  has 
his  permanent  set  of  teeth. 

The  teeth  grow  every  year  from  i  to  i\  of  aninch^ 
but  are  worn  away  at  the  same  ratio  by  use,  so  that 
with — 

Six  years  old  the  black  cavities  or  marks  have 
disappeared  from  the  centre  nippers.  (Fig.  7). 

Seven  years  old  the  black  cavities  or  marks  have 
disappeared  from  the  next  pair.  (Fig.  8). 


80  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

Eiglit  years  old  the  black  cavities  or  marks  have 
disappeared  from  the  corner  teeth.  (Fig.  9). 

With  eight  years  the  upper  and  lower  corner  teeth 
just  meet. 

At  nine  years  old  the  marks  disappear  from  the 
upper  centre  nippers,  and  also  each  of  the  upper 
corner  teeth  shows  a  sharp  protrusion  at  the  extreme 
outer  corner. 

At  ten  years  old  the  marks  disappear  from  the 
next  pair  of  the  upper  jaw. 

At  eleven  years  old  the  marks  disappear  from  the 
corner  teeth  of  the  upper  jaw. 

The  teeth,  which  up  to  this  age  have  an  oval  shape, 
become  broader  and  rounder,  and  change,  between 
the  12th  and  16th  year,  to  a  triangular  shape.  From 
the  16th  year,  they  lose  all  regular  shape,  and  the 
age  can  only  be  guessed. 

The  tushes  or  tusks  in  male  horses  are  cut  be- 
ween  the  3d  and  4th  year  of  age,  are  conical  in  shape, 
somewhat  curved  and  sharp  pointed,  but  are  worn 
down^  with  the  advancing  age  of  the  horse,  to  a  more 
and  more  rounded  form,  and  finally  lose  all  regular 
shape. 

Mares  generally  have  no  tusks  at  all,  or  only 
faintly  visible  tushes. 


EAKEY'S  AND  EOCKWELL'S  METHODS  OF 

TRAINING  YOUNG  AND  OBSTINATE 

HORSES. 

(1)   INTEODUCTION. 

Rarey's  and  Rockwell's  methods,  being  decidedly 
superior  to  other  methods,  are  based  on  an  exact 
knowledge  of  the  individuality  and  the  peculiar 
nature  of  the  horse.  Therefore,  and  because  they 
are  the  result  of  many  experiments,  and  because  of 
a  close  scrutiny  of  the  different  methods  heretofore 
in  use,  they  deserve  to  be  pronounced  the  best. 

Before  proceeding  any  further,  it  will  be  necessary 
to  make  the  reader  aware  of  a  wide-spread  mistake 
in  the  taming  of  wild  and  vicious  horses,  viz  ; 

(2)  FALSE  VIEWS  OF    THE    HABIT  OF   HORSES   TO   SMELL 
AT  UNACCUSTOMED  OBJECTS. 

There  exists  a  prevalent  opinion  amongst  horse- 
men, that  the  scent  is  the  leading  sense  of  the  horse. 
Based  on  this  opinion.  Toucher  and  other  horse- 
tamers,  have  recommended  that  strong  smelling  oils 
and  other  substances  be  blown  into  horses,  nostrils 
for  the  purpose  of  training  them.  Other  ways  are,  to 
blow  in  the  breath,  or  to  moisten  the  hand  with  the 
perspiration  from  under  the  arm  and  to  hold  it 


82  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOKSE. 

under  the  horse's  nose.  All  these  means  have,  so 
far  as  the  scent  is  concerned,  no  effect  whatever 
upon  the  taming  of  the  horse  or  the  possibility  of 
making  it  do  a  certain  thing. 

Earey,     whose     opinion    we    consider     decisive, 
because  consonant  with  nature,  says: 

"  As  the  horse  has  a  habit  of  touching  with  its 
nose  everything  new  to  him,  one  might  believe  that 
it  smells  at  it,  but,  I  believe,  that  the  horse 
uses  its  nose  as  we  use  our  hands,  for  the  purpose 
of  touching  the  object,  because  the  nose  is  the  only 
organ,  that  enables  it,  to  touch  with  an  acute  feeling, 
any  object.  I  believe,  that  the  horse  uses  the 
four  senses  :  seeing,  hearing,  smelling  and  feeling — 
the  sense  of  feeling  being,  perhaps,  the  most  import- 
ant— in  all  his  examinations,  and,  that  the  slow* 
approach  of  the  horse,  and  the  final  touching  of  the 
object  with  the  nose,  is  frequently  done  for  feeling's 
sake — the  sense  of  smelling  being  so  well  developed 
as  not  to  necessitate  the  touching  with  the  nose,  to 
find  out  the  peculiar  smell  of  an  object." 

As  we  cannot  give  any  reason  then,  why  a  horse 
should  comprehend,  by  the  sense  of  smelling,  what 
we  want  of  him,  therefore,  the  use  of  strong  smells 
is  useless  for  the  training  of  the  untamed  horse. 
Only  by  words  and  sounds  are  we  able  to  influence 
it,  to  submit  to  our  demands,  of  its  own  free  will 


BAEEY  AND   ROCKWELL' S  TEAININO  METHODS.       83 

without  using  force.  Through  the  smells  aloue,  we 
can  never  teach  a  horse  anything ;  the  actions  alone, 
accompanying  such  means,  as  :  touching,  caressing, 
speaking,  must  bring  about  the  desired  result, 
erroneously  ascribed  to  such  narcotics.  The  habit 
of  the  horse  to  touch  objects  is  simply  an  emanation 
of  its  peculiar  instinct  to  examine  everything. 

Rarey's  method  is  applicable,  not  only  to  horses 
afraid  of  man,  but  also,  to  such  that  are  vicious  and 
obstinate,  and  therefore,  being  more  in  need  of 
training  than  wild  horses. 

Earey,  who  claims  to  have  tamed  horses  often- 
times at  less  than  one  hour's  time,  bases  his  success 
on  his  skill  to  inspire  the  animal  with  /ear,  love  and 
obedience. 

(3)   FUNDAMENTAL  RULES   OF  RAREY's  THEORY. 

First  Principle :  The  horse  is  naturally  obedient 
and  offers  no  resistance  to  any  demand,  if  put  to  him 
in  a  manner  appropriate  to  his  nature  and  compre- 
hension. 

This  principle  is  based  upon  the  fact,  that  the 
horse,  though  possessed  of  a  strength  far  superior 
to  that  of  man,  is  docile,  because  it  has  neither 
reason  nor  power  of  judging,  therefore,  no  concep- 
tion of  right  or  wrong,  or  of  acts  based  on  a  free  will. 
If  it  had  the  faculty  of  reasoning,  it  would  come  to 


84  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOBSE. 

conclusions,  making  it  entirely  unfit  for  the  service 
of  man. 

Second  Principle :  The  horse  has  no  perception  of 
its  own  strength,  therefore  it  is  submissive  without 
opposition  to  our  will,  as  can  be  seen  daily. 

Third  Principle :  As  the  horse,  according  to  its 
nature,  examines  everything  new  to  him,  it  will  per- 
mit to  be  placed,  before,  over,  or  on  it,  any  object 
ever  so  frightful,  without  creating  any  fear,  provided 
it  causes  him  no  pain. 

A  white  stone,  the  stem  of  a  tree  on  the  road-side, 
looks  strange  and  suspicious,  and  he  refuses  to  pass 
by.  If  we  guide  him  up  to  the  object,  permitting 
him  to  stop  a  minute  and  examine  the  same  with 
his  nose,  the  terror  will  pass  away  and  he  will 
become  reconciled.  Examples  are  military  horses, 
which  are  not  afraid  of  the  noise  of  arms,  drum, 
music,  or  even  firing. 

The  above  mentioned  principles,  based  on  a  nat- 
ural perception  of  the  individuality  of  the  horse, 
may  look  insufficient  and  inappropriate  only  to 
those  who  shut  their  eyes  to  nature  which  governs 
the  instinct  of  animals.  Such  persons  strive  in  vain 
to  reach  by  circuitous  ways,  what  they  could  accom- 
plish by  careful  observation  of  the  peculiarities 
of  all  creatures  and  by  taking  advantage  of  their 
weaknesses.     Wherein  consists  the  superiority  of 


RAHEY  AND  tlOCKWELL^S  TRAINING  METHODS.        8S 

man  over  the  beasts,  and  what  are  the  means  to 
subjugate  powerful  animals  ?  Neither  the  dexterity 
of  man  nor  his  strength,  nor  the  power  of  his  eye, 
would  alone  be  sufficient  to  subdue  them,  if  besides 
these  agents,  there  were  no  other  means  at  his 
disposition.  But  these  means  are  not  the  fire-arms, 
the  chain,  or  the  cage.  They  are  of  a  spiritual 
nature,  founded  on  the  ability  to  penetrate  into  the 
character,  into  the  whole  nature  of  the  animals  and 
their  wants,  to  find  out  their  inclinations  and  to 
gain  their  love.  But,  this  latter  must  be  coupled 
with  fear.  It  is  undeniable,  that  by  kind  treatment, 
speaking,  and  dainties,  we  are  able  to  pacify  the 
liveliest  horse  for  a  time,  but,  on  the  other  hand, 
there  are  also  moments,  when  only  whip  and  spur 
can  subdue  a  refractory  horse  and  make  him  feel 
the  superiority  of  man — means  which,  of  course, 
should  only  be  employed  as  a  last  resort.  If  not 
applied  at  the  proper  moment,  or  in  a  well 
measured  degree,  they  will  render  the  horse 
obstinate  and,  under  circumstances,  entirely  un- 
serviceable. 

As  none  of  all  the  secret  means,  recommended  in 
books  for  the  taming  of  horses,  is  in  correspondence 
with  their  nature  and  not  lastingly  effective,  there  is 
no  other  way  to  educate  the  horse,  according  to  his 
nature,  than  that  guided  by  the  above  principles,  in 


86  now  TO  JUDGE  A  HOKSfi. 

connection  with  the  manipulations  described  further 
on. 

In  the  simpleness  of  the  system,  based  on  the 
most  rational  principles,  rests  the  guarantee  for  the 
practical  execution  and  the  success.  Under  all  cir- 
cumstances, in  handling  a  horse,  preserve  your 
temper,  no  matter  how  provoking,  for,  if  you  lose 
control  of  yourself,  you  will  be  sure  to  lose  control 
of  your  charge.  The  horse  must  be  governed  by 
kindness  and  determination,  not  by  abuse  and 
tyranny. 

4— APPLICATION  OF  RAEEY's  PRINCIPLES  FOR  WILD  AND 
SHY   HORSES. 

For  the  application  of  the  principles  laid  down  in 
the  preceding  chapters,  Rarey  says  : 

"  Provided  with  a  long  whip,  topped  by  a  silk 
snap,  so  as  to  crack  loud,  step  into  the  enclosure 
where  the  horse  is,  stand  still,  allowing  it  to  look  at 
you  a  few  minutes.  If  it  stands  still,  move  up  to  it 
slowly,  the  right  arm  holding  the  whip  stretched 
down  at  your  side,  while  the  left,  bent  in  the  elbow 
with  the  hand  stretched  forward,  is  held  out  toward 
the  horse.  In  this  position  approach  the  horse 
slowly,  but  not  too  directly,  toward  its  head  or  back, 
so  as  to  prevent  its  moving  forward  or  backward ; 
but,  in  case  that  should  happen,  step  carefully  a 


EAREY  AND  ROCKWELL*  S  TRAINING  METHODS.        87 

little  aside,  so  as  to  cause  it  to  stay  where  it  is. 
The  nearer  you  approach,  the  more  move  toward 
its  shoulder,  and  then  stand  still  a  few  seconds.  As 
soon  as  you  come  near  enough,  the  horse  will 
turn  its  head  and  smell  at  the  extended  hand,  not 
because  it  has  a  special  liking  for  that  hand,  but 
because  that  part  of  its  master's  body  is  nearest 
to  it.  As  soon  as  that  occurs,  or  the  horse  is 
touching  any  other  part  of  your  Ifody,  caress  it 
by  stroking  it  in  the  direction  of  the  hair,  in  a 
tender  and  soft  way,  moving  your  hand  as  light  as 
possible  along  the  neck  and  the  side  of  the  head. 
Every  attempt  of  the  horse  to  touch  you  with  its 
nose  is  to  be  favored,  every  touching  of  your  body 
to  be  rewarded  by  tender  caresses,  kind  looks,  and 
gentle  words. 

Iq  speaking  to  the  horse,  always  use  the  same 
tone  of  voice,  because  it  learns  very  soon  to  distin- 
guish, by  the  expression  of  the  face  and  the  tone  of 
the  voice,  what  feelings  govern  its  master. 

5— rakey's  method  or  training  obstinate  horses. 

In  taming  wild  horses  it  becomes  necessary  to 
gain  their  lacking  confidence,  while  with  horses 
being  only  stubborn  and  restive,  turning  around  and 
kicking  at  any  attempt  to  approach  them,  the  neces- 
sary respect  and  fear  must  be  established.    There- 


83  tow  TO  SVMt  A  SOfiSfi. 

fore,  it  is  expedient,  so  as  to  facilitate  the  handling, 
to  give  it  a  few  sharp  cuts  with  the  whip  around 
the  legs  close  up  to  the  body.  The  cut,  applied  there, 
has  more  effect  than  two  or  three  cuts  over  the  back, 
the  skin  on  the  inside  of  the  leg  being  thinner  and 
more  sensitive  than  on  the  back.  If  punishment  be- 
comes necessary,  for  the  purpose  of  inspiring  the 
horse  with  fear  and  of  breaking  his  obstinacy,  not  for 
the  purpose  ftf  inflicting  pain,  we  must  take  care 
not  to  administer  only  one  cut,  as  that  would  only 
produce  anger  instead  of  fear,  thereby  increasing 
the  vice.  As  soon  as  the  horse  shows  fear  enough, 
causing  him  to  stand  still  and  to  pay  attention  to 
you,  approach  him  again  and  flatter  him  more  than 
you  before  whipped  him,  thereby  awakening  in  him 
the  two  chief  factors  to  his  submission  :  fear  and  love, 
and  he  will  willingly  do  what  you  demand  of  him. 

6— THE  HANDLING  OF  UNTRAINED  HORSES. 

Before  making  the  reader  acquainted  with  the 
special  rules  and  manipulations,  necessary  for  the 
handling  of  untrained  horses,  it  is  important  to  im- 
press upon  him  the  following  rules,  experience 
proving  that  success  can  only  be  attained  by  adher- 
ing to  them. 

To  remove  the  terrors,  of  which  the  horse  is 
possessed  by  coming  in  contact  with  man,  and 
to   create   love   and    confidence    to  the    latter,    it 


RAREY  AND  ROCKWELL's  TRAINING  METHODS.        89 

becomes  imperative  to  converse  with  the  animal 
during  the  exercises,  by  speaking,  coaxing,  etc.,  and 
by  increasing  these  caresses,  if  the  horse  permits.  It 
is  absolutely  necessary,  at  first,  to  be  alone  with 
him,  in  some  enclosed  space,  taking  care  that  no 
object  of  any  kind  diverts  his  attention  from  his  mas- 
ter, or  frightens  him  or  makes  him  shy.  Every  at- 
tempt of  the  horse,  to  touch  you  with  his  nose,  or  to 
smell  at  you,  is  to  be  humored,  and  great  care  must 
be  taken,  not  to  change  the  tone  of  the  voice  or  the 
expression  of  the  face,  at  moments  of  displeasure, 
the  horse  understanding  quite  well,  w^hether  anger 
or  love  for  him  govern  you,  the  former  alarming  and 
estranging  him  from  you. 

Never  be  hasty  in  the  exercises  and  never  proceed 
to  anything  new,  before  the  horse  has  perfectly  un- 
derstood the  present  lesson,  and  he  fully  understands 
those  exercises  and  full  confidence  is  established  be- 
tween him  and  his  master.  Never  tire  the  horse  out, 
never  ride  him  warm.  As  soon  as  you  notice  one 
or  the  other,  caress  him  aud  give  him  rest.  By  such 
proceedings,  you  can  avert  the  horse  from  getting 
vicious  and  obstinate,  and  render  him  a  very  will- 
ing and  intelligent  pupil. 

7— PUTTING  THE  HALTER  ON  THE  COLT. 

Place  yourself  on  the  left  side  of  the  colt  ,near  the 
shoulder,  put  both  arms  around  its  neck,  and  hold 


90  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

the  head  of  the  animal  toward  you.  Taking  into 
your  right  hand,  first,  only  that  part  going  over  its 
head,  slip  the  halter,  with  your  left  hand,  gently  over 
the  nose  of  the  colt,  taking  care  that  he  does  not 
start  back,  if  the  hand  is  placed  over  the  same.  As 
soon  as  the  halter  is  put  on,  fasten  to  it  a  long  strap 
or  rope,  and  make  the  colt  walk  around  the  enclo- 
sure, without  pulling  at  him.  As  soon  as  he  feels  the 
hand  on  the  halter,  having  full  play  on  the  line  to 
stride  forward,  he  will  never  pull,  tug,  rear,  nor  throw 
himself  down,  which  he  would  be  sure  to  do,  if  held 
by  force  at  one  place.  The  animal,  not  aware  of  his 
strength,  does  not  know  that  he  could  easily  break 
the  halter,  and  he  will  never  make  use  of  his  strength, 
if  not  provoked  by  tugging  and  jerking. 

If  the  colt  submits  to  being  held  by  a  short  line, 
and,  without  shying,  permits  you  to  approach, 
proceed  to  make  him  tractable.  For  this  pur- 
pose, do  not  stop  in  front  of  the  animal,  trying  to 
pull  it  after  you,  but  try  to  guide  it  to  one  side. 
It  will  follow  a  gradual  pull  on  the  halter  to  that 
side,  not  being  able  to  offer  much  resistance  with  its 
neck.  As  soon  as  it  has  made  a  few  steps  sideward, 
caress  and  repeat  the  manoeuvre,  until  you  can 
guide  it  in  any  direction. 

By  repeated  practising,  and  by  the  increasing  love 
to  its  master,  gained  through  gentle  intercourse,  it 


RAREY  AND  ROCKWELL's  TRAINING  METHODS.        91 

will  soon  understand  that  it  has  to  follow  him,  and 
that  the  more  so,  as  it  does  not  know,  that  on  ac- 
count of  its  strength,  it  need  not  follow.  Before 
leading  the  horse  out  of  the  enclosure,  lead  it  first 
around  for  a  little  while  and  then,  opening  the  door, 
lead  it  past  the  same  a  few  times,  finally  guiding  it 
slowly  through  the  door,  by  taking  hold  of  the  hal- 
ter with  your  left  hand  close  to  the  mouth,  while 
the  right  hand,  resting  on  the  neck,  grasps  the  mane. 
After  a  short  time,  you  may  gently  guide  it,  as  you 
please.  It  will  always  willingly  come  up  to  you. 
Care  must  be  taken,  that  no  objects  are  near  that 
may  cause  it  to  shy,  and  that  no  other  person  be 
present;  to  divert  its  attention. 

8 — TO  TRAIN  THE  COLT  TO  GO  AT  THE  SIDE  OF 
A  TRAINED   HORSE. 

For  this  purpose,  take  a  trained  horse  into  the 
stable,  and  put  the  colt  at  his  right  side.  Fasten  a 
second  strap  to  the  halter  of  the  young  horse,  pull 
that  across  the  breast  of  the  old  horse,  which  should 
be  mounted  first,  and  take  the  end  into  your  left 
hand.  If  you  then  take  the  other  strap  into  your 
hand,  the  latter  strap  will  prevent  the  stepping  too 
far  forward,  the  former,  the  hanging  back.  In  this 
manner,  guide  the  horses  around  in  the  stable  a  few 
times  and  then  go  out  of  doors.     In   case   of  the 


92  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 

stable  door  being  too  narrow  for  both  horses  to  pass 
through,  at  the  same  time,  guide  the  old  horse  out 
first,  turn  it  around  so  as  to  face  the  door,  then,  bring 
the  colt  near  the  door,  take  hold  of  the  straps  as  de- 
scribed before,  let  somebody  urge  the  colt  out  gently, 
turn  the  old  horse  to  the  left  and  everything  is  again 
in  good  order.  The  above  straps  are  sufficient  to 
keep  the  head  of  the  young  horse  turned  toward  the 
old  one,  so  as  to  control  it.  Should  it  become  ob- 
stinate, refusing  to  go  on,  turn  the  old  horse  toward 
the  right,  that  is,  against  the  neck  of  the  colt,  com- 
pelling it  to  turn  a  few  times,  when  it  will  be  willing 
to  stride  forward  again. 

After  having  taught  the  young  horse  to  be  guided, 
take  it  back  to  the  stable  and  tie  it  so  that  it  cannot 
tug  on  the  halter.  If  the  young  horse  refuses  to 
follow  the  old  one,  which  has  been  taken  in  the  sta- 
ble first,  take  hold  of  the  halter  with  your  left  hand 
near  the  head,  place  your  right  hand,  armed  with  a 
whip,  over  the  back  of  the  colt,  direct  its  head 
toward  the  stable  door  and  administer  a  light  cut 
with  the  whip  as  far  back  as  possible.  The  cut 
coming  from  behind  and  from  the  other  side,  the 
colt  will  move  forward  and  to  that  side  where  his 
master  is.  All  the  master  has  then  to  do,  is  to  give 
with  his  left  hand,  the  proper  direction,  and  it  will 
go  into  the  stable  without  further  trouble. 


BAEEY  AND  ROCKWXLL's  TRAINING  METHODS.        93 

Should  it  not  be  possible  in  this  way  to  get  the 
colt  into  the  stable,  lead  it  around  in  all  directions, 
stopping  occasionally  at  the  door,  and  it  will  not 
take  ten  minutes  before  it  will  enter.  Never  try  to 
pull  a  young  horse  into  the  stable  by  force,  as  it 
would  learn  to  regard  the  stable  as  a  dangerous 
place. 

9— TO  TIE  THE  YOUNG    HORSE,    WITHOUT    ITS    PULLING 
AT    THE    HALTER. 

The  young  horse  should  be  fastened  in  a  stall, 
rather  wide,  but  not  too  long,  so  that,  on  account  of 
a  movable  crossbeam,  fastened  at  a  short  distance 
behind  the  colt,  it  is  not  able  to  step  back  enough 
to  tug  at  the  halter  in  a  straight  direction  backward. 
If  the  animal  is  then  tied  in  the  middle  of  the  stall, 
the  halter  will  prevent  its  turning  far  to  the  right  or 
left,  and,  compelled  to  stand  quiet,  it  will,  even  if 
tied  by  a  light  strap,  never  try  to  break  it. 

Rockwell's  method  to  cure  horses  from  pulling  at 
the  halter,  is  first,  to  place  a  common  halter  on  him  ; 
then  put  on  a  common  girth.  Take  a  half-inch  rope, 
about  twenty  feet  long,  pass  the  centre  of  this  rope 
under  the  tail  in  place  of  a  crouper,  twist  the  rope 
over  a  couple  of  times,  pass  the  ends  of  the  rope 
under  the  girth,  bringing  one  end  up  on  each  side  of 
the    neck  and  pass  the  ends  under  the  girth  and 


u 


HOW  TO   JUDGE  A  HORSE. 


througli  the  nose-piece  of  the  head  stall,  under 
the  cheek  pieces,  and  tie  to  a  stout  post,  leaving 
about  three  feet  play  of  rope.  As  soon  as  the 
horse  pulls  back,  he,  being  tied  by  the  tail  to  the 
post,  pulls   upon   his    tail,   Fig.  15,   and   the   hurt 


Fig.  15. 

coming  from  there,  instead  of  the  head,  where 
he  expected  it,  he  will  start  forward,  it  being  natural 
to  go  from  the  hurt.  There  is  no  danger  accom- 
panying this,  and  if  he  is  in  the  habit  of  pulling 
at  night,  this  arrangement  may  be  left  on,  without 
fear  of  the  horse  getting  tangled  in  the  rope.  Com- 
mon sense  will  show  you,  that,  as  there  is  no  pull 
upon  the  head,  and  consequently  no  hurt  there,  he 
will  soon  cease  pulling  and  lose  the  habit.  To  make 
the  lessons  still  more  effective,  you  may  cause  him 
to  pull,  by  using  such  exciting  means  as  are  apt  to 
alarm  him. 


RAREY  AND   ROCKWELL' S  TRAINING  METHODS.        9o 

10— BRIDLE  PULLING—  (rOCKWELL)  . 
Pat  a  rope  under  the  tail  in  the  same  manner  as  in 
halter  pulling,  except  that  you  pass  the  ends  through 
the  rings  of  the  bridle,  and  tie  him  to  a  post  where 
he  is  in  the  habit  of  pulling — unhitching  the  wagon, 
if  one  was  attached.  Step  away  and  frighten  him  by 
whatever  is  apt  to  cause  him  to  pull.  As  he  pulls, 
the  pressure  coming  upon  the  tail,  he  will  step  up  to 
the  post.  Take  hold  of  the  rope  between  the  j^ost 
and  his  head  and  give  it  a  few  pulls  back  and  forth. 
By  these  means,  he  will  learn  to  step  forward  rather 
than  to  step  backward.  After  a  few  lessons,  he  may 
be  tied  by  a  common  tie-strap,  the  end,  however, 
passing  through  the  ring  of  the  bridle  bit  and  being 
tied  to  the  back  strap.  Do  this  until  you  are  satis- 
fied you  have  effected  a  cure. 

11— PUTTING    ON  THE   BIT,    (aFTER  RAREY). 

A  smooth  but  thick  joint-bit,  with  bars  on  either 
side,  is  the  most  proper  for  a  young  horse.  This  bit 
must  be  buckled  into  the  head  stall  of  the  bridle  at 
first  without  reins,  checks  and  blinkers,  and  the 
horse  be  allowed  to  walk  around  free,  in  a  large 
space,  until  he  gets  used  to  it,  so  as  to  make  no 
attempt  to  free  himself  of  the  bit.  These  proceed- 
ings are  to  be  repeated  a  few  times,  before  going  any 
further.     Put,  also,  a  halter  over  the  bridle,  as  the 


96  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 

young  torse  will  be  more  willing  to  be  guided  by  the 
halter  strap  than  by  the  bit,  which  it  is  not  accus- 
tomed to  as  yet. 

12— TO  GET  THE    COLT  USED  TO    THE    BIT,    (AFTER 
ROCKWELL). 

Place  on  the  colt  an  ordinary  head  stall  with  a 
joint  bit  without  any  check  strap  or  reins.  Leave 
him  in  the  stable,  or  yard,  for  a  short  time,  then  re- 
move the  bit.  Frequently  replace  it  and  allow  it  to 
remain  on  for  a  short  time.  By  this  means,  which  is 
a  great  improvement  on  the  old  way  of  putting  on 
the  bitting  bridle  at  once,  his  mouth  becomes  used 
to  the  bit.  After  a  few  times  doing  this,  the  colt 
will  be  ready  for 

13 — THE    BITTING   BRIDLE,    (rOCKWELL).    Fig.  16. 

For  this,  first  prepare  a  well-padded  leather  girth, 
with  a  large  ring  firmly  riveted  on  to  the  centre  of 
the  girth,  over  the  back  and  three  buckles,  six  inches 
apart  from  each  other  and  the  ring.  Put  on  a 
common  riding  bridle  or  head  stall  without  blinds, 
and,  under  all  circumstances,  use  a  joint  bit,  gag 
runners  (loops)  being  well  placed  up  towards  the  ears, 
and  the  throat  lash  made  large  and  to  buckle  very 
loose  under  the  gag  runner.  The  side-straps  to  be 
about  six  feet  long  with  a  snap  at  one  end  and  holes 
for  the  buckle  tongue  at  the  other.   Fasten  the  strap, 


KAKEY  AND   EOCKWELL's  TBAINING  METHODS.         97" 

with  the  snap,  to  the  ring  in  the  centre  of  the  girth 
pass  the  other  end  of  the  strap  through  the  gag  run- 
ner on  the  near  side  of  the  horse,  passing  it  from 
toward  the  nostrils  back  through  the  ring  of  the  bit. 
Draw  it  tolerably  light  and  fasten  in  the  buckle. 
Do  the  same  on  the  offside.     You  will  see  that  by 


Fig  16. 
fastening  the  strap  well  up  toward  the  ring  in  the 
centre,  it  will  compel  him  to  hold  his  head   high 
and  throw  the  nose  out.    By  fastening  them   well 
down  on  the  side,  it  will  lower  the  head  and  curve 


98  How  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSil. 

tlie  neck,  at  the  same  time  giving  liim  tlie  power  to 
move  the  head  up  and  down  with  perfect  ease. 
In  cases,  where  bitting  is  required  only  for  the 
purpose  of  suppling  and  developing  the  muscles 
of  the  neck,  this  bridle  should  be  used,  as  no  horse 
being  geared  in  this  bridle  will  be  injured,  in  case 
of  falling  backward. 

14 — BITTING  THE  COLT,    (eOCKWELL). 

In  placing  the  bitting  bridle  upon  the  colt,  great 
care  should  be  taken  not  to  buckle  the  straps  tight 
at  first,  as  you  might  give  pain,  and  alarm  the  ani- 
mal.    Be  particular  to   have  the    throat-lash  quite 
loose,  so  that  it  will  not  choke  him.     Many  horses 
have  been  ruined  by  carelessness  in  this  particular. 
In  gearing  him  up,  care  should  be  taken,  that  the 
check  is  not  too  tight  at  first,  lest  he  should,  in  rear- 
ing, go  over  backward  and  fall  on  the  top  of  his  head. 
Another  reason  is,  that  he  will  yield  more  readily  to 
the  side  reins.    The  checking  up  should  be  governed 
by  the  length  and  form  of  the  neck  and  shoulders.  As 
soon  as  the  colt  shows  a  disposition  to  yield,  the  bridle 
should  be  removed  or  the  straps   loosened.     This 
should  be  done  within  at  least  five  minutes  from  the 
time  it  is  put  on.     The  oftener  it  is  taken  off  and  re 
placed  for  the  first  three  days,  the  better.      Do  not 
however  remove  it  while  the  colt  is  sulky  and  refus- 
ing to  move  his  head.     A  lesson  here  to  be  taught 


BAEEY  AND  ROCKWELl's  TEAINING  METHODS.        99 

him,  is,  tliat  lie  cannot  be  loosened  from  the  restraint, 
loMle  he  is  resisting  it.  This  will  prove  useful  in  all 
future  dealings  with  the  animal.  Should  he  prove  un- 
usually stubborn  and  refuse  to  yield,  you  may  make 
use  of  what  we  denominate  the  "  Yankee  Bridle.''''  It 
consists  of  a  common  bridle  head  stall  and  a  jointed 
bit  with  double  rings,   Eig.   17.     Fasten  the  cheek 


Fig.  17. 

pieces  of  the  head  stall  to  the  loose  rings  on  either 
side  and  the  reins  or  rope  to  the  rings  of  the  bit. 

In  using  this  bit  on  a  refractory  horse,  take  a  rope 
about  ten  feet  long,  tie  one  end  to  the  near  side  ring 
of  the  bit,  pass  the  other  end,  under  the  jaw,  through 
the  offside  ring  of  the  bit,  then  bring  the  rope  over 
the  neck  from  the  off  side  to  the  near  side,  placing 
it  about  where  the  collar  usually  comes.  Then  pass 
it  down  the  near  side,  and  through  and  over  that 
portion  of  the  rope  which  is  between  the  two  bit 
rings  under  the  jaw.  Now  as  you  tighten  upon  the 
rope,  see  Fig.  18,  you  will  perceive  that  the  tendency 
of  the  two  rings,  attached  to  the  cheek  pieces,  is  to 
play  loosely  upon  the  bit  and  to  move  toward  the 


100  HOW  TO  JUDGfi  A  HORSE. 

centre  or  joint  of  the  bit,  and  that  they  will  conse- 
quently press  tightly  upon  the  cheeks.  The  sensation 
which  this  pressure  occasions,  you  may  illustrate,  by 
pressing  inwardly  upon  your  own  cheeks  with  your 


Fig.  18. 

mouth  partially  opened.  The  effect  upon  a  horse  is 
instantaneous  and  irresistible.  It  cannot  injure 
and  is  a  safe  and  reliable  controlling  power. 

15 — SADDLING  THE  HORSE,    (rAREY). 

In  putting  on  the  saddle,  take  care  that  the  stir- 
rups do  not  hang  down  so  as  to  touch  the 
horse,    thereby    irritating     and     frightening    him. 


'eabey  and  Rockwell's  training  methods.    101 

Sling  a  knot  in  the  stirrup  straps,  put  the  saddle 
flaps  together,  take  the  saddle  under  your  right  arm, 
and  walk  slowly  up  to  the  horse.  As  soon  as  you 
are  near  enough,  lift  the  saddle  up  gradually,  and 
while  caressing  the  animal,  let  him  touch  and  look 
at  it.  Then  open  the  saddle  flaps  and  stroke  the 
horse  with  the  saddle  gently,  along  the  neck,  to  make 
him  accustomed  to  the  noise  made  by  the  pushing 
to  and  fro  of  the  saddle.  By  and  by,  do  the  same 
with  the  saddle  farther  back,  until  you  may  finally 
put  it  over  his  shoulders  and  gently  down  on  his 
back.  Shake  the  saddle  flaps  and  keep  busy  about 
the  saddle,  take  it  off  again,  put  it  right  on  again^ 
and  the  horse  will  no  longer  offer  any  resistance. 

Before  these  manipulations,  examine  the  padding 
of  the  saddle  so  as  to  protect  the  horse's  back  from 
becoming  galled  by  the  saddle,  then  fasten  it 
by  means  of  the  girths,  quite  loosely,  just  enough 
to  hold  it  in  place.  To  avoid  frightening  the  horse, 
by  fastening  the  girths,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to 
remove  everything  disturbing,  for  instance  :  loose 
tangling  straps,  etc.  Put  the  straps,  as  gently  as 
possible,  around  the  horse,  not  pulling  them  tight, 
and  lead  the  horse  about. 

After  he  gets  a  little  used  to  the  saddle  on  his 
back,  tighten  the  girths  slowly,  as  much  as  necessary, 
without  irritating  the  animal.     Take  a  whip  in  your 


m 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 


right  hand,  put  your  right  arm  over  the  saddle,  and 
taking  up  the  reins  on  both  sides  of  the  neck,  with 
the  right  and  left  hands,  walk  the  horse  around  until 
he  gets  sufficiently  used  to  the  reins  and  that  you  may 
turn  and  stop  him  by  gently  pulling  the  reins.  As  soon 
as  he  stands  still,  loosen  the  reins  slightly.  Always 
bear  in  mind  to  execute  all  these  preparations  with 
no  other  person  present,  but  in  a  large  stable, 
or  some  other  enclosed  space,  where  there  is  no 
danger  of  getting  hurt  in  mounting  the  horse  after- 
ward. It  is  essential  that  you  should  talk  to  and 
caress  the  horse  during  and  after  every  exercise.  In 
this  way  you  will  accomplish  more  in  hours  than 
otherwise  in  months. 

16 — MOUNTING  THE   HORSE,    (RAREY). 

Having  adjusted  bit,  reins,  and  saddle,  the  horse 
is  ready  to  be  mounted.  Before  you  actually  mount 
him,  prepare  him  properly  by  caressing  and  stroking 
him  on  both  sides  of  the  saddle  and  over  the  whole 
body,  and  then  gently  and  gradually  make  him  ac- 
customed to  a  pressure  upon  his  back  and  to  receive 
the  weight  of  his  master.  This  end  you  will  not 
reach  untill  all  fear  is  removed,  and  the  animal  has 
learned  to  stand  still  without  being  held,  and  not  to 
get  alarmed  at  the  sight  of  the  rider  wherever  he 
jnay  be.    The  best  way,  to  accustom  the  horse  to 


EAEEY  AND   ROCKWELL's  TRAINING  METHODS.      103 

the  weight  of  the  rider,  is  to  mount  from  a  block  of 
one  to  one-and-a-half  feet  high.  As  the  horse  is 
watching  every  change  in  the  position  of  his  master 
and  is  very  apt  to  get  alarmed  by  his  suddenly 
jumping  on  the  block,  get  on  the  block  very  slowly, 
allowing  the  horse  to  see  you  in  the  position  of  first 
having  only  one  foot  on  the  block,  being  the  same 
position  as  when  mounting  the  horse.  If  the  horse 
does  not  show  any  fear,  let  the  stirrups  down  gently, 
put  the  left  foot  in  the  stirrup,  taking  care  not  to 
touch  the  horse  with  the  toes  under  the  shoulder. 
The  knee  should  be  close  to  the  saddle,  the  left  hand 
taking  hold  of  a  lock  of  the  mane,  the  right  hand 
placed  on  the  cantle  of  the  saddle.  Lifting  yourself 
up  a  little  from  the  block,  let  the  horse  gradually 
feel  the  whole  weight  of  your  body,  first  on  the  stir- 
rup, then  in  the  saddle.  Be  very  careful  in  doing 
that,  for  it  is  the  critical  moment,  and  if  done  too 
rashly,  it  may  spoil  the  animal  for  a  long  time.  Re- 
peat this  exercise  several  times,  each  time  liftiag 
yourself  a  little  higher. 

The  reason,  for  mounting  from  a  block,  is  that  the 
horse  will  not  feel  the  weight  of  the  rider  at  once, 
but  gradually,  and,  besides,  the  rider  is  not  com- 
pelled to  spring,  to  get  into  the  saddle,  and  lastly, 
the  horse  will  gradually  become  accustomed  to  the 
high  position,  in  which  he  will  afterward  see  his  rider. 


104 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 


17 — RIDING  THE  HORSE,    (rAREY). 

As  the  fear  of  the  horse  is  not  entirely  allayed  yet, 
and  it  being  easily  alarmed  and  irritated  by  new  im- 
pressions and  unwonted  handling,  it  is  apparent  that, 
to  cause  it  to  move  on,  the  rider  should  not  attempt 
to  urge  it  forward  by  kicking  it  in  the  sides  with 
his  heels.  Better  caress  and  speak  to  him,  and  if 
he  does  not  go  forward  then,  turn  him  a  little  to  the 
left,  until  he  begins  to  move,  permitting  him  to 
jnove  slowly  and  with  loose  reins.  Continue  in  this 
manner  until  the  horse  has  walked  around  the  en- 
closure for  a  few  times  and  got  used  to  the  bit  and 
reins,  permitting  you  to  guide  and  stop  him  at  your 
pleasure.  This  exercise  should  not  last  longer  than 
half  an  hour  so  as  not  to  annoy  him.  Eepeat  the 
same  twice  a  day  for  a  few  days.  In  dismounting, 
and  taking  off  the  saddle  and  bridle,  use  the  same 
precaution,  not  to  alarm  the  horse.  "Withdraw 
your  right  foot  slowly  from  the  stirrup,  with  the 
left  hand  take  hold  of  the  mane  and  reins,  lift  your 
leg  slowly  over  the  croup,  being  careful  not  to  touch 
the  horse  with  the  boot,  and  let  yourself  slowly 
down  to  the  block  or  ground,  all  this  time  speaking 
to  the  horse.  Eepeat  mounting  and  dismounting 
several  times  during  each  lesson. 

After  a  few  days  the  horse  will  be  quiet,  and  it 
will  then  be  time  to  take  him  outdoors.   There  it  will 


EAREY  AND  ROCKWELL' S  TRAINING  METHODS.      l6§ 

naturally  be  inclined  to  gallop,  to  jump,  and  to  shy, 
and  care  should  be  taken  to  remove  every  object  apt 
to  excite  the  animal. 

In  mounting  the  horse  outdoors,  take  the  left  rein, 
short,  so  as  to  enable  you  to  hold  him  and  to  draw 
his  head  toward  you  in  case  he  should  shy  or  step 
sidewards. 

If  the  horse  entirely  refuses  to  move  on,  after  the 
rider  is  in  the  saddle,  turn  his  head  to  one  side 
and  thus  the  horse  several  times  around  in  a  circle. 
If  then  let  loose,  he  will  without  using  the  whip, 
be  glad  to  move  forward. 

It  is  quite  improper  to  use  a  martingale  at  the  first 
lessons  of  the  horse  under  saddle,  as  the  animal 
will  more  willingly  submit  to  the  guidance  of  the 
hand,  if  the  pull  of  the  rein  comes  in  a  straight  line, 
as  if  that  direction  were  broken  by  the  martingale. 
The  use  of  a  martingale  ma}''  only  then  be  justified, 
if  the  horse  carries  his  head  too  high,  or  stretches 
his  nose  too  far  out. 

18— RIDING  THE  HORSE,    (ROCKWELL). 

This  should  not  be  done  before  the  horse  is  well 
bridle  broken.  Begin  the  lesson  in  the  barn  or  yard. 
Place  on  him  a  common  riding  bridle  without  girth 
or  martingale.  Tie  the  bridle  reins  together  on  top 
of  the  neck,  tight  enough  to  check  him  just  a  little. 


i06        '  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A   HORSE. 

Stand  on  iLe  near  side,  near  the  shoulder,  throw 
strap  across  the  withers,  near  where  the  reins 
lie.  Quietly  r.ach  down  in  front  and  caress  the 
fore  legs,  and  as  soon  as  the  horse  is  sufficiently 
calmed,  tie  the  strap  to  the  off  leg,  just  below 
the  fetlock.  If  he  is  restive  and  prevents  you  from 
tying  it,  or  shows  signs  of  striking  or  kicking,  take 
him  by  the  head  and  tail,  the  left  hand  well  up  to 
the  head,  and  whirl  him  around  two  or  three  times, 
and  while  he  is  disconcerted  by  this  movement, 
stoop  and  tie  the  strap.  Then  take  hold  of  the  near 
rein,  within  about  four  inches  of  the  head,  and  with 
the  right  hand  draw  up  the  strap  so  as  to  pull  the 
foot  clean  from  the  ground,  at  the  same  time,  pulling 
on  the  rein  toward  you,  quite  firmly,  until  he  has 
made  two  or  three  hops  on  three  legs.  The  points, 
to  be  gained  by  this,  are :  first,  you  teach  the  colt 
that  he  is  not  to  be  hurt  and  that  he  cannot  get 
away.  This  tends  to  prevent  his  plunging  when  you 
afterward  attempt  to  ride  him.  Second,  by  putting 
the  strap  across  the  back,  it  accustoms  him  to  bear 
a  weight  upon  his  back.  Third,  it  prevents  him  from 
throwing  himself  over  backward.  Fourth,  it  accom- 
plishes your  desire  in  a  safer  and  quicker  way  than 
any  other  known.  Now  take  a  shorter  hold  on  the 
strap,  with  the  foot  held  up,  passing  your  right  arm 
well  over  his  back,  with  the  left  hand  take  hold  of 


EAREY  AND  ROCKWELL's  TRAINING  METHODS.      107 

the  reins  and  mane  near  the  withers,  and  then  make 
the  motion  of  mounting.  Do  this  a  few  times  until 
the  colt  gets  accustomed  to  the  new  positions  and 
movements.  Then  gently  mount  him,  the  foot  being 
still  held  up.  Now  let  down  the  foot  and  start  him 
along.  If  he  shows  signs  of  being  restive,  or  at- 
tempting to  throw  you,  pull  up  the  foot  and  caress 
him.  He  will  not  fall  down  while  the  foot  is  up,  as 
it  might  be  supposed  he  would.  Keep  well  hold  of 
the  foot  strap,  untie  the  knot  in  the  reins  and  letting 
down  the  foot,  commence  turning  him  from  side  to 
side  and  urging  him  forward.  If  he  is  unwilling  to 
start,  take  a  whip  into  the  same  hand,  with  which 
you  hold  the  foot  strap,  and  gently  touch  him  with 
it  on  the  off  hind  leg,  just  back  of  the  stifle,  gradually 
increasing  the  blows  until  he  starts,  at  the  same 
time  loosening  the  reins.  In  turning  him,  use  cau- 
tion, and  do  not  pull  upon  but  one  rein  at  a  time,  for 
the  reason,  that,  if  you  pull  on  both,  the  colt  will  be 
apt  to  run  backward,  sideways,  or  otherwise  act  awk- 
wardly. Do  not  ride  him  very  far  the  first  time. 
This  lesson  with  the  foot  strap  should  be  repeated 
three  or  four  times,  until  the  colt  is  accustomed  to 
your  presence  upon  his  back,  and  to  your  legs  against 
his  side.  Having  never  been  thrown  from  a  colt, 
since  I  adopted  this  plan,  I  firmly  believe  that  no 
better  method  of  training  the  colt  to  ride,  is  known, 


BEEAKING  THE  HOKSE  TO  HABNESS. 

19 — HARNESSING  THE   HORSE,    (rOCKWELL). 

The  same  precautions  should  be  used  as  in  sad- 
dling the  horse.  After  the  harness  is  put  on  care- 
fully, put  on  a  bridle  without  blinds,  and  walk  him 
around  the  yard,  or  allow  him  to  remain  in  the  stable 
for  about  half  an  hour,  to  become  accustomed  to  the 
rattling  of  the  straps  and  the  feeling  of  the  harness 
in  these  unwonted  positions,  then  remove  the  har- 
ness. After  a  while,  put  the  harness  on  again  for  a 
short  time,  and  again  remove  it  a  few  minutes 
after.  The  third  time  you  harness  the  horse,  pass 
the  traces  through  the  rings  of  the  breeches  and  tie 
them,  drawing  the  traces  and  the  breast  collar  pretty 
snugly  together  against  the  body.  After  a  little 
while,  you  may  commence  to  drive  him  with  the 
reins,  turning  him  in  different  directions  and  gently 
urging  him  forward,  impressing  upon  him  the  fact, 
that  you  control  him,  thus  teaching  him  to  obey  the 
reins  and  to  go  without  leading.  Be  careful  each  time 
to  repeat  the  word  **  ivhoa  "  at  the  same  moment  you 
pull  on  the  reins  to  stop  him.    This  exercise  usually 

.108 


BREAKING  TfiU  HOUSE  TO  HAHNESS.  109 

occupies  three  days'  time.     As  soon  as  lie  appears 
handy  with  the  reins,  you  are  then  ready  for 

20— HITCHIXa   UP   THE   COLT,    (ROCKWELL). 

If  possible  avoid  hitching  him  up,  single.  If  it  is 
necessary,  to  do  so,  be  particular  to  place  him  in  the 
shafts  as  quietly  as  possible.  As  there  is  no  danger 
attached  to  this  transaction,  we  have  no  established 
rule,  leaving  the  operator  to  be  governed  by  circum- 
stances and  his  own  judgment.  Before  hitching  him 
to  a  wagon,  rattle  the  shafts,  shako  the  wagon,  walk 
him  out  and  in  between  the  shafts,  lead  him  in  to- 
ward the  wagon,  uncheck  him  and  allow  him  to 
examine  in  his  own  way  the  object,  so  new  and 
terrifying  to  him.  You  must  accustom  him  to  the 
wagon,  or  there  is  danger.  If  he  continues  frightened, 
in  spite  of  these  efforts,  it  will  be  well  to  let  him  go 
for  a  while.  Then  try  again,  until  he  gets  quiet.  You 
may  then  hitch  him  to  the  wagon,  and  drive  him  very 
carefully  on  level  ground  for  a  few  minutes,  for  the 
first  few  times  avoiding  backing  and  turning,  if  pos- 
sible, being  careful  for  a  few  days  to  give  only  short 
drives.  Three  miles  and  back,  afterwards,  will  do  no 
harm,  gradually  toughening  the  colt  to  do  your  work. 

Our  method,  however,  and  the  only  one  that  can 
be  safely  used,  is  to  hitch  the  colt  up  alongside  of  a 
broken  horse,  putting  him  on  the  offside.    There  are 


llO  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 

several  reasons  for  hitcliing  on  the  offside.  It  is 
usual  to  jump  from  a  wagon  on  the  nearside  ;  and  in 
this  act,  if  ajij  accident  shall  happen,  such  as  your- 
self falling  down,  or  any  other  movement,  likely  to 
alarm  the  horse,  he  may  start,  and,  if  he  were  on  the 
nearside,  he  would  wheel  around  from  you,  and  per- 
haps do  damage,  before  you  got  within  reach ;  while, 
if  he  was  on  the  offside,  he  would,  if  frightened, 
wheel  towards  you,  the  broken  horse  being  likely  to 
remain  steady.  Another  reason  is,  that  the  opera- 
tions with  the  colt  have,  thus  far,  mainly  been  on  the 
nearside,  and  it  will  not  seem  quite  so  strange  to 
him,  to  have  a  horse  on  that  side. 

The  harness,  being  on  both  horses  (quite  loosely 
on  the  colt),  with  long  inside  reins,  you  will  buckle 
a  strap  around  the  near  fore  foot  of  the  colt,  just  below 
the  fetlock,  with  an  inch  ring  slipped  on  the  strap. 
Tie  a  long  line  to  the  ring,  pass  it  under  the  girth  of 
the  colt,  bring  it  up  on  the  outside  of  his  trace, 
and  hold  it  in  your  right  hand.  The  driving  lines 
hold  in  your  left  hand.  You  will  then  drive  the 
team  about.  As  you  start  them,  promptly  and  deci- 
dedly, use  such  word  as  you  choose,  never  varying 
from  the  same  word,  frequently  pull  up  the  lines 
and  say:  ^^  lulioa^'  at  the  same  time,  draw  upon 
the  line,  attached  to  the  foot,  until  the  foot  is  lifted 
from  the  ground  and  held  there,  leaving  the  colt 


feREAKIKG  THE   HOESE   TO   HAR^'ESS.  111 

standing  on  three  legs,  in  spite  of  his  struggles. 
After  a  few  times  cloiug  this,  you  may  unharness 
him,  as  this  is  sufficient  for  the  lesson.  When  ready 
to  hitch  up,  which  you  may  do  now  at  your  leisure, 
you  will  do  as  before,  and  after  a  little  driving,  hitch 
the  team  to  a  wagon  and  get  in.  You  may  now  start 
off  slowly,  stopping  the  team  once  or  twice,  while  on 
a  walk,  saying,  **  ivlioa  "  as  before,  and  pulling  up 
the  foot  strap.  You  will  now  readily  perceive,  that 
you  have  perfect  control  over  the  colt's  movements, 
whether  on  a  walk  pr  trot,  without  any  danger  to  the 
colt.  The  colt  will  not  stumble,  strange  as  it  may 
appear,  it  being  almost  impossible  for  him  to  fall  by 
this  means  while  in  motion.  A  long  experience 
warrants  this  statement.  Short  and  lively  drives 
are  what  you  now  want,  until  the  colt  becomes  broken 
and  obeys  the  rein  and  word,  ^'whoa.'"  You  may 
then  change  sides  with  him,  to  teach  the  other  side  of 
him,  of  course,  changing  the  foot  strap  to  the  inside, 
each  time.  When  he  has  by  these  means  become 
accustomed,  to  being  handled  freely,  you  may  hitch 
him  up,  feingle  or  double,  as  you  choose,  for  he  is 
now  ready  to  drive. 

21 — TEACHING  THE  COLT  TO  BACK,  (rOCKWELL). 

This  should  not  be  attempted,  until  the  colt  has 
been  driven  at  least  eight  or  ten  days,  nor  until  the 


il2  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  kOilM, 

habit  of  readily  stopping,  starting,  driving  and  obey- 
ing the  reins  has  been  formed.  If  you  adopt  this 
rule,  no  colt  will  balk,  throw  himself  down  in  harness, 
run  into  a  fence,  or  refuse  to  stand  while  the  driver 
is  getting  into  the  carriage.  "When  sufficient  time 
has  elapsed  to  warrant  you  in  undertaking  to  teach 
him  to  back,  take  a  common  bridle  —  a  bitting 
bridle  is  best — and  begin  by  taking  hold  of  the 
side  reins,  standing  in  front  of  the  colt,  gently  push- 
ing backward,  saying,  "  Backj^  at  the  same  time  he 
steps  back.  This  you  will  repeat,  until  he  readily 
takes  two  or  three  steps  backward,  when  you  will 
release  him  for  the  present.  At  the  next  trial,  you 
may  put  on  the  reins  and  take  your  position  behind 
him,  passing  the  reins  through  the  side  rings  of  the 
strap,  or,  if  obliged  to  use  a  harness,  passing  the  reins 
through  the  shaft  straps,  holding  the  reins  well  down 
by  his  side,  to  prevent  him  from  turning  round  and 
facing  you.  Have  him  loosely  checked.  As  you  step 
behind  him,  pull  gently  on  the  reins,  and  as  he  steps 
backward,  say,  "  Bach,''  and  immediately  slacken  the 
reinSo  A  half  an  hour's  exercise  is  usually  sufficient 
at  a  time,  repeating  the  operation  until  he  backs 
readily.  It  is  well,  to  give  him  one  or  two  sharp 
steady  pulls,  for  eight  or  ten  feet  backward,  just  be- 
fore leaving  him  each  time.  He  is  now  ready  to  be 
hitched  up,  as  you  usually  hitch  up  your  horses^,  and 


BREAKING  THE  HOESE  TO  HARNESS.      Il3 

ready  to  form  the  habit  of  backing  to  wagon  at  the 
word.  Be  careful  for  the  first  few  times  not  to  ask 
him  to  back  with  a  load,  each  time  having  the  wagon 
in  a  favorable  position,  as  descending  ground,  when 
the  attempt  is  made.  By  using  this  precaution, 
the  colt  will  soon  learn  to  be  handy,  and  practice 
will  perfect  him. 

22 — REFUSING   TO    PULL,    (rAREY.) 

Any  faults,  on  the  side  of  the  horse,  are  generally 
the  consequence  of  false  treatment,  and  the  best 
proof  for  this  assertion  is  the  refusal  of  the  horse  to 
pull.  This  opposition  is  not  founded  in  the  nature 
of  the  horse,  but  only  occurs  in  a  certain  state  of  the 
same,  as :  excitement,  perplexion,  etc.,  brought 
about  by  irrational  treatment.  It  often  happens, 
that  a  lively  horse,  hearing  the  voice  of  his  driver, 
will  jump  in  the  harness,  thereby  not  moving  the  load, 
but  receiving  a  jerk  on  his  shoulders,  which  throws 
him  backward,  and  which  at  the  same  time  will 
stop  the  other  horse.  The  driver  generally  continues 
to  urge  the  horses  on.  Before  the  quiet  horse  begins 
to  pull,  the  lively  one  has  made  another  plunge  and  is 
again  thrown  backward.  The  quiet  horse,  not  being 
able  to  pull  the  load  alone,  will  also  become  per- 
plexed and  will  stand  still,  not  knowing  what  to  do. 
Oftentimes,  then,  they  have  to  suffer  from  the  stu- 


114  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

pidity  of  tlie  driver,  who  whips  them  in  his  blind  rage. 
But  this  makes  matters  worse,  the  horse  gets  obsti- 
nate and  the  next  time  he  will  be  sure  not  to  pull  at 
aU. 

If  a  horse  refuses  to  pull,  be  kind  to  him,  caress 
him,  allay  his  excitement  by  speaking  and  stroking 
his  neck,  and  leave  the  team  alone,  for  ten  or  fifteen 
minutes.  Then  urge  them  on  again,  turning  the 
horses  a  little  to  the  right  and  left,  so  as  to  get  them 
in  motion,  before  they  feel  the  pressure  of  the  load 
behind  them.  Drive  about  twenty  paces  and  stop 
again,  before  the  balky  horse  stops  on  his  own  ac- 
count.    Then  caress  and  start  again. 

In  correcting  such  a  horse,  it  is  a  good  plan  to 
first  hitch  him  with  a  quiet  horse  to  an  empty  wagon, 
tie  the  traces  of  the  quiet  horse  a  little  shorter,  so  as 
to  cause  him  to  take  the  load  alone  at  first  starting 
By  this  means,  the  excitable  horse  will  become  ac- 
customed to  walk  by  the  side  of  the  other  horse. 
You  may  then  hitch  both  horses  equally  long,  drive 
up  some  hill,  first  with  the  empty  wagon,  then  with 
a  load  on,  and  you  will  surely  get  the  horse  to  pull. 

23 — TO     DRIVE   WILD     HORSES;    OR,     SUCH      OF     VICIOUS 
HABITS,    (rAREY.) 

The    manipulations    are     similar    to    Eockwell's 
method,  described  in  ^^  Hitching  up  the  colt."    Rarey 


BREAKING  THE   HORSE  TO   HARNESS.  Uo 

says :  It  is  only  necessary  to  tie  up  one  fore-leg,  so 
that  the  hoof  points  upward,  nearly  touching  the 
body.  The  horse,  then  standing  on  three  legs  only, 
is  not  able  to  kick,  but  you  may  do  with  him,  what 
you  please.  Should  he  begin  to  jump  or  get  wild,  he 
will  soon  quiet  down,  seeing  the  futility  of  his  at- 
tempts to  free  himself.  As  soon  as  he  gets  quiet, 
untie  him  again,  stroke  his  leg,  caress  him,  give  him 
a  little  rest,  and  tie  the  leg  up  again. 

The  next  step  is  to  lead  the  horse  about  until  he 
has  learned  to  walk  on  three  legs  only.  Then  hitch 
him  to  a  small,  light  wagon,  and  let  him  walk  at  lei- 
sure. Being  unable  to  kick  or  run  away,  you  have 
nothing  to  fear.  You  may  safely  give  him  the  reins, 
and  even  use  the  whip.  He  will  soon  tire  out  and  stop 
on  his  own  account,  even  if  he  were  the  wildest  horse 
that  ever  had  a  harness  on. 

The  horse,  being  first  alarmed,  with  such  treat- 
ment, as  soon  as  he  perceives  that  no  harm  is  done 
to  him,  will  quiet  down  and  pay  no  farther  attention 
to  the  harness.  This  is  the  best  cure  for  the  vice 
of  kicking. 

24 — TO  TEACH  A  HORSE  TO  LIE  DOWN,  (RAREY.) 

Bend  the  left  fore  foot  in  the  knee,  put  a  strap 
Fig.  19,  around  the  fore  arm  and  fetlock,  so  that  he 
cannot  sat  his  foot  down  on  the  ground.    (Fig.   20). 


llfi 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 


Fig.  19. 


Fig.  19a 


Place  a  girth  around  the  horse's 
body,  fasten  a  strap  with  an  inch 
ring  attached  around  the  horse's 
right  fetlock,  tie  a  strap  or  rope 
into  this  ring,  and  draw  the  strap 
through  the  girth  under  the  belly, 
Fig.  20.  Standing  on  the  left 
side,  take  firm  hold  on  the  bridle 
rein  with  your  left  hand,  near  the 
bit,  and  while  pulling  the  strap 
with  your  right  hand,  press 
against  the  shoulder  of  the  horse, 
until  he  moves.  As  soon  as  this 
happens,  lift  up  the  right  leg  by 
a  strong  pull  on  the  strap,  and  he 
will  sink  down  on  his  knees.  As 
the  horse  may  begin  to  struggle, 
take  a  firm  hold  on  the  strap,  so 
as  to  prevent  him  from  regaining 
his  feet.  If  he  rears  up,  turn 
his  head  toward  you.  Fig.  21, 
and  he  will  soon  get  tired  and 
sink  down  on  his  knees  again. 
Crowd  with  your  shoulder  gradu- 
ally, not  violently,  against  his 
side,  and  after,  perhaps,  ten 
minutes,    he   will    turn  over   on 


RAKEY  AND   EOCKWELl's  TRAINING  METHODS.     117 

his  right  side  away  from  you,  and  you  can  do  with 
him  what  you  please,  Fig.  21a.  Another  way  is, 
after  the  horse  is  on  his  knees,  to  pull  his  head 
sharply  to  the  right,  until  he  gets  tired,  loses  his 
balance  and  will  fall  over  to  the  left  or  toward  you. 
Fig.  20a.  Unfasten  the  straps,  stretch  out  his  legs, 
caress  and  stroke  his  neck,  speak  to  him  gently,  and 
after  about  fifteen  minutes,  allow  him  to  get  up 


Fig.  20. 


118 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 


again,  using  tlie  words :  "  Get  up.''  Kepeat  three 
or  four  times  in  one  lesson,  and  give  two  lessons  a 
day.  After  four  lessons,  the  horse  will  surely  lie 
down  without  these  resources,  by  simply  lifting  up 
one  leg  and  touching  the  other  at  the  knee,  with 
a  whip. 


Fig.  20a. 
25— THROWING  A  HORSE,    (ROCKWELL). 

The  easiest  and  most  effectual  method  of  throwing 
a  horse,  is  to  strap  up  the  near  fore  foot,  put 
on  a  surringle  with  a  ring  fastened  to  the  top  of  it ; 
tie  a  half-inch  rope  around  his  neck  in  the  same 
manner  you  would  hitch  him  by  the  neck ;  place  it 


Fig.  21a. 


120 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOKSE. 


up  near  the  throat  lash  with  the  knot  on  the  near 
side  ;  pass  the  rope  through  the  mouth  and  bring  it 
along  his  neck  on  the  off  side,  and  pass  it  through 
the  ring  on  the  back,  standing  back  on  the  near  side 
about  six  or  eight  feet  from  the  horse  opposite  his 
near  side  hind  leg,  drawing  the  rope  sufficiently  tight, 


Fig.  22. 

to  keep  it  in  the  mouth.  Pull  carefully  until  he 
yields  his  head  a  little  to  the  off  side  ;  then  give  a 
sharp,  strong  pull,  and  keeping  your  hold,  pull 
sharply,  until  he  is  down,  Fig.  22,  which  will  occupy 
from  one  to  five  seconds.  As  he  goes  down,  lying 
upon  the  near  side,  you  keep  the  rope  tightened 
and  he  cannot  get  up.  By  repeating  this,  you  will 
soon  make  him  quite  a  trick  horse,  as  he  will  learn 
to  lie  down,  by  simply  pulling  on  the  off  bridle  rein. 
Throwing  is  often  necessary  in  surgical  operations, 
and,  as  the  horse  may  be  thrown  on  either  side  and 


EAREt  ANi)  KOCKWELl's  TRAINING  METHODS.     121 

with  perfect  safety,  by  tliis  plan,  it  is  preferable  to 
the  old  way  of  throwing  by  main  strength. 

26 — to  teach  a  horse  to  follow  his  master, 
(rarey). 

Take,  the  horse  into  a  large  stable  or  barn,  step 
up  to  him,  take  hold  of  the  halter,  and  touching  him 
with  a  long  whip  gently  over  the  loins,  turn  his  head 
toward  you.  Then  lead  him  on  the  halter  strap, 
through  the  stable,  caressing  and  speaking  to  him, 
using  the  words  :  "  Come  here,  Sir  !''  and,  as  often 
as  you  turn  around,  touch  him  with  the  whip  to 
cause  him  to  step  up  close.  Should  he  stop  and  turn 
around,  administer  a  few  sharp  cuts  with  the  whip 
around  his  hind  quarters,  causing  him  to  turn  his 
head  quickly  toward  his  master.  After  each  touching 
with  the  whip,  caress  again.  To  avoid  the  touch  of 
the  whip,  the  horse  will  soon  come  up  on  his  own 
account  to  be  caressed,  without  being  pulled  by  the 
halter.  After  a  lesson  of  half  an  hour,  it  will  follow 
his  master  through  the  whole  stable. 

After  the  stable  lessons  have  been  repeated  three 
or  four  times,  he  must  be  taken  out  of  doors  and 
the  lessons  repeated  until  he  is  safe. 

27— TO  CAUSE  THE  HORSE  TO   FOLLOW  YOU,  (ROCKWELL). 

To  cause  him  to  follow  you  while  his  head  is  con- 
fined with  a  bridle  or  halter,  put  on  the  "  Yankee 


122  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORS£. 

Bridled  See  Fig.  18.  Take  liold  of  tlie  rope  about 
two  feet  from  tlie  head,  give  liim  a  few  sliort,  quick 
side  pulls  to  the  right  and  left,  then,  taking  quickly 
hold  of  the  rope  farther  towards  the  end,  as  you  step 
back,  say  decidedly  :  "  Come  here,  Sir."  If  he  comes 
forward,  caress  him  ;  if  he  does  not  come,  give  him 
a  pull  with  a  sideways  tendency,  and  repeat  the 
attempt  to  have  him  come  forward,  until  he  does 
come ;  then  start  off  either  to  the  right  or  left, 
with  the  rope  slackened  ;  if  he  does  not  follow  3^ou, 
give  him  more  pulls  sideways  and  try  him  again. 
With  an  ordinary  horse  you  can  teach  the  lesson  in 
ten  minutes,  so  as  to  be  followed  by  him  when  you 
are  near  the  head.  Step  partially  behind  him, 
laying  the  rope  along  his  back,  and  say :  "  Come 
here.  Sir."  He  will  not  be  likely  to  do  it,  because 
he  h:is  only  been  taught  to  go  forward  at  the  words. 
To  teach  him  to  follow  you  in  this  direction,  you  will 
then  chirrup  to  start  him,  repeating  the  words.  If 
he  comes,  caress  him  ;  if  he  does  not  come,  or 
moves  in  the  wrong  direction,  pull  upon  the  bridle, 
caressing  him  as  he  obeys.  The  same  rule  will  apply 
to  any  direction  in  which  you  wish  him  to  follow 
you.  It  is  quite  necessary  to  teach  the  horse  this 
habit,  as  it  is  the  foundation  of  many  others,  and  is 
one  of  the  most  valuable  which  the  horse  can 
possess. 


BAEEY  AND  ROCKWELL'S  TRAINING  METHODS.       123 

To  teach  him  for  your  amusement  to  follow  you 
when  entirely  loose,  put  on  the  near  fore  foot,  a  long 
foot  strap,  and  place  on  him  a  girth ;  and  holding 
the  end  in  your  hand,  step  away  from  him  ;  then  step 
toward  him  and  if,  he  attempts  to  step  away  from 
you,  pull  up  on  the  strap  and  say  :  "Whoa."  If  he 
stops,  step  up  and  caress  him ;  repeat  until  he  will 
allow  you  to  step  up  to  him  without  moving  away. 
Now  take  a  short,  blunt  whip  in  your  right  hand, 
and  the  strap  in  your  left,  standing  by  his  side,  pass 
your  right  arm  over  the  withers  and  gently  touch 
him  on  the  offside  of  the  head ;  if  he  starts  to  move 
off,  pull  up  on  the  strap,  and  say  :  "Whoa."  When 
he  turns  his  head,  caress  him  gradually  with  the 
whip,  forcing  him  to  turn  his  head  around  toward 
you.  When  he  will  do  this,  every  time  you  put  the 
whip  over,  you  may  remove  the  foot  strap  and  prac- 
tise him  in  the  lesson,  until  he  will  come  to  you, 
every  time  you  lay  the  whip  across  his  neck ;  then 
put  on  the  foot  strap  again,  put  your  whip  in  the 
same  position  and  hit  him  in  the  same  place  quite 
hard,  at  the  same  time,  saying  :  "  Come  liere,  Sir.'' 
After  a  little,  he  will  be  very  prompt ;  then  place  him 
in  a  corner  and  step  off  at  a  distance  of  eight  or  ten 
feet,  and  say  :  "  Come  here,  Sir.''  If  he  comes,  ca- 
ress him  ;  if  he  does  not  come,  hit  him  gently  on  the 
breast  with  a  long  whip.    He  will,  perhaps,  struggle 


124  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

to  get  away,  and  if  lie  attempts  to  get  out  of  the  cor- 
ner, pull  up  on  the  strap.  "When  he  faces  you,  step 
up  to  him  and  caress  him,  placing  him  back  in  the 
corner  and  repeat.  If  he  finally  shows  a  disposition 
to  follow,  step  back  coaxingly,  and  when  he  stops, 
caress  him ;  at  each  further  repetition  use  the  words: 
"  Come  herey  Sir^^  at  each  motion  of  the  whip.  In 
this  way  he  will  soon  learn  to  follow  you  at  the  word, 
if  you  have  a  whip  in  your  hand.  Don't  take  him 
out  of  doors  to  practise  until  he  is  quite  perfect,  and 
then  begin  in  a  small  yard  and  alone. 

28 — TO  TEACH  THE    HORSE    TO    STAND    STILL    WITHOUT 
TYING,    (RAREY). 

After  the  horse  has  learned  to  follow  his  master, 
make  him  stand  in  the  middle  of  the  stable,  caress 
him  at  the  head  and  neck,  and  gradually  farther  and 
farther  back.  As  soon  as  he  moves  or  walks  away, 
give  him  a  sharp  cut  and  take  him  back  to  the  place 
where  he  first  stood.  If  he  stands  quiet,  caress  him 
by  moving  all  around  him.  Each  time  he  moves, 
administer  a  cut  and  begin  again.  He  will  soon 
stand  still ;  walk  faster  around  him,  touching  him 
only  now  and  then  ;  move  around  him  in  wider  cir- 
cles, and  if  he  stands  still,  step  up  to  him  and  caress 
him,  and  continue  the  circling.  Don't  leave  the 
horse  too  long  on  the  same  spot,  but  walk  him  for  a 


EAUEt  AND  Rockwell's  tbaIkikg  methods.     1^5 

change  througli  the  stable,  and  repeat  the  lesson  on 
another  spot.  The  lesson  should  not  last  longer 
than  half  an  hour. 

29  — BAD   TO   BRIDLE,    (rOCKWELL). 

With  the  *'  Yankee  Bridle,"  Fig.  18,  pull  his  head 
down  and  gently  handle  his  ears.  When  he  will  al- 
low you  to  do  so  without  trying  to  get  his  head  up, 
loosen  up  and  allow  him  to  lift  it.  If  he  is  inclined 
to  strike  with  the  fore  legs,  put  on  the  halter  and  tie 
him  to  a  post,  then  apply  the  "  Yankee  Bridle " 
sharply,  keeping  at  a  distance  ;  then  approach  him, 
keeping  the  halter  pulled  tight  by  means  of  the  rope 
in  your  hand,  and  pulling  his  head  down,  handle  his 
ears  gently.  When  he  allows  it  quietly,  caress  him. 
If  he  is  inclined  to  back,  back  him  into  a  stall 
and  repeat.  In  half  an  hour  he  will  allow  you  to 
handle  his  ears  to  your  liking.  Kepeat  whenever  he 
shows  signs  of  returning  to  his  old  habit. 

If  you  have  no  time  to  break  him,  in  putting  on 
the  bridle,  pass  your  right  hand  under  the  neck,  take 
hold  of  the  nose  from  the  opposite  side  ;  with  your 
left  hand  pass  the  bits  into  his  mouth ;  take  your 
hand  from  the  nose,  and  with  it  carefully  put  on  the 
headstall,  while  your  left  hand  is  in  the  mouth  work- 
ing at  the  bit,  shaking  and  fumbling  it  to  keep  his 
attention,  until  the  headstall  is  properly  placed. 


126  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 

If  hard  to  put  the  bit  in  the  mouth,  pass  your  right 
hand  around  under  the  neck,  and  take  hold  of  the 
nose.  With  the  left  hand  press  the  lips  against  the 
bridle  teeth,  before  the  bit  touches  the  teeth.  This 
will  cause  him  to  open  the  mouth.  To  break  up  the 
habit,  use  the  Yankee  Bridle  while  bitting,  passing 
the  bit  in  and  out,  hitting  the  teeth  each  time.  This 
will  cure  him. 

30— BAD  TO  BACK,   (kOCKWELL). 

Use  the  Yankee  Bridle,  and  tie  the  horse  to  a  ring 
in  the  wall  with  a  long  halter  strap.  Lead  him  past  the 
wall  with  a  long  halter  strap.  Lead  him  past  the 
ring  as  far  as  the  halter  will  allow,  and  from  the  op- 
posite side  from  the  halter,  pull  back  upon  the 
Yankee  Bridle.  Do  not  use  at  this  time  any 
words.  Continue  this  until  he  backs  readily  at  the 
pull,  then  begin  using  the  word,  "Back,"  and  re- 
peat until  he  understands  the  meaning  of  the  word 
and  will  back  upon  being  told  to.  Do  this  next  in 
harness,  and  if  necessary  after  he  is  hitched  to  wagon. 
There  is  no  difficulty  in  soon  fixing  the  lesson  upon 
his  attention,  so  that  he  will  never  forget  it. 

31 — HARD  PULLEES,    (eOCKWELL). 

Give  a  horse  which  pulls  upon  the  bit,  all 
the  road  he  wants,  and  let  him  go.  If  he  goes  too 
fast;  jerk  upon  one  line  and  then  the  other,  slackeu 


EAREY  AND  ROCKWELL^S  TRAINING  METHODS.       127 

Up  and  let  him  go  again.  If  this  does  not  answer, 
drive  him  with  the  Yankee  Bridle,  without  the  rope, 
attaching  the  lines  to  its  bit  without  martingale. 

32— SHOEING   THE   COLT,    (ROCKWELL). 

To  prepare  a  colt  for  shoeing  the  first  time,  tie  a 
long  strap  around  his  neck,  pass  it  along  the  near 
side,  between  the  hind  legs,  and  bringing  it  around 
the  near  hind  leg,  close  up  to  the  body,  pass  it  under 
the  strap  around  the  neck ;  then  draw  upon  the  strap, 
holding  him  meanwhile  by  the  bridle.  The  colt  will 
probably  be  nervous  at  the  pull,  and  you  will  loosen 
it  and  caress  him  over  the  face  and  neck,  gradually 
tightening  at  each  successive  pull,  using  no  words 
but  gentle  ones,  and  not  saying,  "  Whoa."  When 
he  has  become  accustomed  to  that,  lower  the  strap 
to  a  point  just  above  the  hock,  and  gradually  pull 
upon  the  strap  until  you  lift  the  leg,  at  the  same  time 
pulling  upon  the  bridle  with  a  side  or  back  pull,  to 
prevent  his  stepping  forward. 

When  you  have  thus  succeeded  in  easily  lifting 
the  leg  pretty  well  up,  you  will  find  that  you  can 
take  it  up  with  your  hand  and  hold  it.  The  same 
process  must  of  course  be  gone  through  with  on  the 
other  leg,  and  after  about  ten  lessons,  your  colt  is 
ready  to  go  to  the  blacksmith.  The  rule  has  usually 
been  to  take  the  colt  to  the  blacksmith  first,  but  he 


12S  fiOW  TO  JTtOaE  A  HOUSE. 

is  more  than  apt  to  get  bad  habits  by  being  forced 
into  position  to  be  shod  and  probably  gets  wounded 
lo  his  injury,  if  the  blacksmith's  stock  of  patience  is 
not  very  large.  Shoeing  should  always  be  done  as 
the  feet  grow  tender,  and  if  quite  young,  shoe  very 
often. 

If  a  liorse  does  not  submit  quietly  to  he  shod  in  case  he 
is  nervous,  no  good  will  come  of  the  blacksmith  deal- 
ing roughly  with  him,  beating  and  otherwise  mal- 
treating him. 

Another  simple  and  effective  way  to  overcome  the 
difficulty  without  resorting  to  violence,  may  be  found 
in  the  following  : 

Tie  a  light,  but  strong  rope  or  strap  on  the  lower 
jaw,  keeping  the  tongue  above.  Fasten  a  riug  in  the 
tail,  and  another  near  the  month,  in  the  rope  ;  then 
pass  the  rope  through  the  ring  in  the  tail  and  back 
through  the  ring  near  the  mouth.  Then  pass  the 
rope  back  of  the  horse  and  draw  his  head  to  one  side, 
while  you  shoe  his  feet  on  the  other  side.  Eeverse 
the  rope  to  shoe  the  other  side. 

In  shoeing  horses  for  corns,  care  must  be  taken  that 
the  ■  corn  be  well  cut  out  and  a  little  butter  of  anti- 
mony or  muriatic  acid,  applied  to  the  part  affected. 
The  hoof  from  the  corn  backward  must  be  cut  away, 
so  that  no  part  of  the  heel  strikes  the  shoe,  avoiding 
pressure,  and  relieving  the  part  from  unnecessary 


RAREY  AND  ROCKWELL's  TRAINING  kETfiODS.       12^ 

concussion.  A  horse  thus  shod,  no  matter  how  bad 
his  corns  may  be,  will  travel  sound  and  with  perfect 
ease,  that  otherwise  shod  would  be  decidedly- 
lame. 

in  slioeingfor  quarter-cracks  care  and  judgment  is 
required.  The  horse  should  be  shod  precisely  on 
the  same  principles  as  for  corns  ;  a  bar-shoe  often 
recommended,  is  unnecessary. 

Properly  shod,  there  will  be  but  little  trouble  in 
growing  out  a  sound  hoof.  The  least  pressure  upon 
the  heel  of  the  shoe  will  be  sufficient  to  prevent  the 
hoof  from  growing  down,  and  thus  defeat  any  efforts 
which  may  be  made  toward  remedying  the  injury. 
So  soon  as  three-eighths  or  half  an  inch  of  new  horn 
has  grown  down,  the  roof  should  be  burned  with  a 
red-hot  iron  just  above  the  crack,  at  right  angles 
with  it,  which  will  prevent  its  breaking  up  anew.  A 
little  tar  or  hoof  ointment  should  be  kept  upon  the 
part,  which  will  protect  it  from  dirt  and  assist  in 
hastening  the  growth  of  the  new  horn,  usually  re- 
quiring six  to  nine  months  for  the  crack  to  grow 
out. 

33  — STRIKING     AND     KICKING     WHILE     SHOEING, 
(ROCKWELL). 

Some  horses,  especially  stallions,  are  in  the  habit 
of  striking  with  the  fore  legs,  if  the  attempt  is  made 


13d  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

to  shoe  them.  Tie  up  tlie  left  front  leg,  stand  on  the 
other  side  of  him  and  pull  his  head  toward  you.  In 
this  way  he  cannot  strike,  and  the  blacksmith  will 
meanwhile  shoe  the  leg  tied-up.  Do  the  same  with 
the  right  fore  leg. 

For  kickers  take  a  long  rope,  tie  it  around  the 
neck  with  a  slip-noose  knot  (placing  it  well  down  on 
the  neck)  pass  it  between  the  fore  legs,  bring 
it  around  the  near  hind  leg  just  above  the  hock  and 
pass  it  through  the  portion  around  the  neck  which 
gives  you  a  means  of  holding  the  hind  leg.  This 
will  convince  the  horse  that  he  is  over-matched. 
Pull  up  the  hind  leg  with  one  hand,  and  on  the 
Yankee  Bridle  with  the  other.  If  time  is  important 
you  will  find  it  advisable  to  shoe  him  while  thus 
held,  which  can  be  done  wdth  a  little  inconvenience, 
changing  the  straps  as  you  chaDge  legs.  Every 
time  you  do  this  without  hurting  him  goes  to  help 
cure  him.  The  same  rules  will  apply  to  mules, 
though  mules  are  controlled  easier. 


BITS    AND    BITTING. 

The  art  of  bitting  a  horse  properly  is  so  little  un- 
derstood, that  it  would  seem  that  some  hints  about 
the  conformation  of  a  horse's  mouth  and  the  place 
where  to  locate  the  bit,  might  be  appreciated  by  those 
who  take  a  lively  interest  in  the  well-being  of  our 
dumb,  patient  friends  ;  the  same  time  reaping  for 
themselves  the  benefits  derived  from  proper  bitting: 

The  many  complaints  we  so  frequently  hear: 
"I  dont  know  what  makes  my  horse  pull  so  hard"; 
or,  "  what  makes  him  poke  out  his  nose  ";  or,  "he  does 
not  come  up  to  the  bit",  etc.,  would  very  soon  cease 
to  be  heard.  L- nf  ortunately,  the  bitting  of  horses  is 
generally  left  to  persons  who  have  not  the  faintest 
knowledge  of  the  anatomy  of  a  horse's  mouth,  and 
whose  faculty  of  reasoning  does  not  go  a  great  way. 
They  conclude  a  bit  is  a  bit,  and  toss  the  same  up  as 
high  as  possible  into  the  *'  critter's  mouth,"  but,  be- 
yond that,  they  don't  bother  their  poor  brains. 
"Whether  the  master  rides  or  drives  comfortably  or 
not,  an  accident  happens  or  not,  they  don't  care 
much.  At  any  rate,  it  is  never  their  fault  — *'  the  boss 
is  no  good  anyhow."  When  will  the  time  come  that 
gentlemen  take  a  personal  interest  in  these  matters 

131  ! 


l32  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOtlsfi. 

by  studying  the  yery  simple  laws  of  nature,  thereby 
making  themselves  independent  from  their  grooms, 
and  the  stories  they  tell  them  about  their  horses. 

There  is  nothing  more  awkward  and  difficult  to 
manage,  than  a  horse  with  a  bit  not  perfectly  adapted 
to  his  mouth,  ^nd  to  his  whole  frame  or  one  that  has 
been  ill  placed.  Many  an  otherwise  excellent  horse 
has  been  put  down  as  a  worthless  brute  and  sold, 
and  all  on  account  of  improper  bitting. 

There  are  three  dimensions  of  the  interior  of  the 
horses  mouthy  which  must  be  accurately  ascertained 
before  attempting  to  fit  him  with  a  proper  bit. 

The  first  is  the  transversal  width  of  the  mouth, 
from  side  to  side,  measured  at  a  point  directly  oppo- 
site the  chin  groove. 

The  second  dimension  is  the  distance  of  the  bars  or 
the  width  of  the  channel  in  which  the  tongue  lies, 
and  which  determines  how  much  of  the  mouthpiece 
may  be  allowed  for  the  port. 

The  third  dimension  is  the  height  of  the  bars,  or, 
the  distance  between  their  upper  surface  and  the 
bottom  of  the  chin  groove. 

The  mouthpiece  ought  to  be  just  so  wide  as  to  fit 
the  horse's  mouth  snugly.  If  wider,  it  will 
slip  from  side  to  side,  and  the  edges  of  the  port  if 
there  are  any — press  upon  the  very  sensitive  bars, 
causing  the  horse  intolerable  pain ;  to  avoid  which, 


BITS   AND   BITTING.  183 

lie  will  eitlier  poke  out  liis  nose  or  creep  back  behind 
tlie  bit,  sometimes  with  very  serious  consequences 
as  :  rearing,  bolting,  plunging,  etc.  If  the  mouth- 
piece is  too  narrow  it  compresses  and  chafes  the 
lips,  and  by  displacing  them  so  that  the  folds 
cover  the  bars,  the  direct  action  of  the  bit  on  the 
lattc-r  is  neutralized,  and  the  horse  becomes  numb 
in  the  mouth. 

The  width  of  the  2^0Ttj  which  in  most  bits  we  see 
is  from  one-half  to  one  inch  too  wide,  must  corre- 
spond exactly  with  the  width  of  the  tongue-channel 
at  the  point  opposite  the  chin  groove,  and  which  is 
exactly  one  and  a  third  inches.  This  being  the 
proper  place  where  the  mouthpiece  should  rest  in 
the  horse's  mouth,  the  width  of  the  port,  therefore, 
should  be  the  same,  viz  :  one  and  one-third  inches, 
or,  even  slightly  less,  say :  one  and  one-quarter  in- 
ches, to  avoid  bruising  the  bars  as  mentioned  above. 
The  sole  purpose  of  the  port  beiug  to  make  room 
for  the  tongue,  its  height  should  not  exceed  five- 
eighths  of  an  inch,  as  being  sufficient  for  any  horse. 
The  higher  the  port,  the  greater  the  danger  of 
injuring  the  roof  of  the  mouth  when  pressure  is 
brought  upon  the  reins,  and  of  making  the  horse 
restive. 

Horses'  mouths  are  very  different  in  formation 
and  size,  but  the  heighth  of  a  horse's  bars  is  nearly 


134  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSi!. 

constantly  one  and  three -fourth  inches,  therefore, 
the  length  of  the  upper  branch  of  the  bit  should  be 
exactly  the  same,  meaning  the  distance  from  where 
the  curb  hook  rests,  in  the  upper  ring,  to  the  centre- 
line of  the  mouthpiece  where  that  is  riveted  to  the 
side  branches. 

Thus,  we  get  a  right-angled  triangle,  formed  by  the 
upper  branch  of  the  bit,  an  imaginary  line  drawn 
from  the  mouthpiece  to  the  chin  groove  (both  being 
one  and  three-fourth  inches  long),  and  the  curb  chain. 
Only  under  these  conditions  can  the  chain  rest  in 
its  proper  place,  that  is,  in  the  chin  groove,  and  act 
as  a  fulcrum  to  the  leverage  of  the  bit.  The  chain 
thus  remaining  stationary,  causes  the  horse  no  pain, 
and  it  will  yield  readily  to  the  pressure  of  the 
mouthpiece  on  his  jaws. 

The  upper  branch  of  the  bit  being  one  and  three- 
fourth  inches,  the  lower  one  should  be  three  and  one- 
half  inches,  to  be  in  the  ratio  of  1  and  2— with  very 
big  horses  three  and  three-fourth  inches — giving  the 
rider  all  the  necessary  lever  power  for  controlling 
the  horse. 

The  bit  put  into  the  horse's  mouth,  the  mouthpiece 
should  be  placed  right  opposite  the  chin  groove,  the 
curb  chain  twisted  so  as  to  be  perfectly  smooth  and 
hooked  in,  so  that  there  is  room  for  the  first  three 
fingers  of  the  hand,  when  put  between  chain  and 


Mts  and  BiniNd. 


ISS 


chin-groove. 

If  the  reins 

are    then 

pulled,  the 

side   branches   of   the 

bit  will  form  an  angle 

of    about    20    degrees 

with  the  mouth. 

If  the  upper  branch 
is  too  long,  the  curb- 
chain   will  mount   iqj- 
ivard  and   press  upon 
the      sensitive     outer 
parts     of      the      jaw.  RIGHT   WAY 
Moreover,  there  will  be  no 
lever  action,  and  the  horse 
will,  therefore,  bore  in  the 
rider's  hand — the  bit  stands 
stiff.     On  the  other  hand, 
if  the  upper  branch  is  too 
short,  the  hit  falls  through^ 
the   curb   will,    no   doubt, 
remain  in  the  chin-groove, 
but,  forming  a  very  acute 
angle  with  the  branches  of 
the  bit  itself,  will  have  no 


moNGf  my 

Fig.  23. 


136  How  TO  JUDGfi  A  HOBSE. 

value  as  a  prop,  but  tlie  lever  action  will  be  too 
great.  It  will  be  now  easily  understood  how  it 
comes  tliat  people,  in  order  to  prevent  a  bit  with 
very  short  upper  branches,  from  falling  through, 
are  driven  to  use  a  very  tight  curb,  the  result  being 
that  the  whole  action  of  the  bit  is  transferred  from 
the  interior  of  the  mouth  to  the  chin.  In  order  to 
prevent  a  bit,  with  very  long  upper  branches,  from 
standing  stiff,  they  use  a  very  loose  curb,  which  has 
the  effect  of  making  the  bit  fall  through  ;  or,  what 
is  very  common,  a  bit,  with  very  long  upper 
branches,  is  pulled  up  as  high  as  it  will  go  into  the 
horse's  mouth,  and  then,  either  a  loose  curb  is 
attached,  in  which  case  this  great  piece  of  iron- 
mongery, of  course,  falls  through,  and  has  not  the 
expected  effect;  or,  they  put  the  curb- chain  very 
tight,  in  which  case  the  chain  rests  above  the  chin- 
groove,  hurting  the  horse  considerably  with  the 
result  that  it  will  bore  in  the  rider's  hand,  and 
try  to  run  away.  Whereas,  a  much  smaller  and 
lighter  bit,  if  adapted  to  the  mouth,  would  be  much 
more  efficient. 

The  structure  and  size  of  the  horse's  bars  and 
tongue  must  also  be  considered,  as  those  factors  de- 
termine the  thickness  of  the  mouthpiece.  A  horse, 
with  fleshy  bars  and  a  thick  tongue,  needs  what  is 
called  a  sliarp  hit,  viz :  a  thin  mouthpiece,  one-half 


BITS  AND  BITTING.  137 

incli  in  diameter.  A  horse  with  high,  sharp  bars, 
and  a  fine  tongue  (the  characteristic  of  well-bred 
horses),  requires  a  very  light  mouthpiece,  yiz  :  three- 
quarters  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  Thus  the  thicker 
the  mouthpiece,  the  lighter  the  bit. 

Sometimes  we  meet  with  the  erroneous  idea  that 
it  is  the  actual  weight  of  the  bit  in  pounds  and 
ounces  which  constitutes  a  light  or  a  sharp  bit,  and 
that  the  lighter  ones  are  :  "  Ladies'  bits."  A  light 
bit,  under  these  suppositions,  in  a  lady's  hand,  might 
prove  the  cause  of  serious  misunderstandings  be- 
tween the  fair  rider  and  her  horse.  It  is  the  horse 
and  not  the  rider,  that  carries  the  bit,  and  a  few 
ounces  more  or  less,  do  not  make  the  slightest 
difference.  Nothing  but  the  conformation  of  the 
horse's  mouth  should  guide  us  in  selecting  a  bit. 

Some  bits  have  movable  mouthpieces,  which  to  a 
certain  extent,  make  horses  light  in  hand,  as  they 
play  with  the.  mouthpiece,  but  the  mouthpieces 
cannot  prevent  the  horse  from  putting  his  tongue 
over  the  bit,  and  through  the  constant  friction,  the 
mouthpiece  soon  becomes  loose  at  the  sides  where 
it  is  inserted  in  the  side  branches,  and  the  horse's 
lips  grow  sore  from  being  pinched  and  chafed. 

Some  horses  acquire  the  bad  habit  ^  placing  the 
tongue  over  the  hit  and  lolly ing  it  out  in  front,  or  to 
one  side.     It  generally  originates  from  bad  and  se- 


Fig.  24. 


BITS  AND   BITTING.  130 

vere  biting  in  connectiou  with  a  fleshy  tongue,  in 
which  case  the  mouthpiece  cuts  the  latter,  thereby 
stopping  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and  causing 
severe  pain,  to  escape  which  the  horse  draws  his 
tongue  back  and  ]3laces  it  over  the  mouthpiece.  This 
makes  matters  still  worse,  as  then  the  edges  of  the 
port,  which  as  before  stated  are  generally  too  wide, 
press  into  and  bruise  the  sensitive  bars.  The  horse 
will  then  either  pull  hard  against  or  shrink  back 
from  the  rider's  hand,  rendering  him  often  quite 
unmanageable.  With  carriage  horses  this  lolling 
out  of  the  tongue  is  generally  the  result  of  the 
bearing  reins  being  too  short. 

Other  horses  again  form  the  dangerous  habit  of 
grabbing  at andholding  the  loicer  branch  of  the  bit  with 
their  lips  and  teeth,  on  one  side  or  the  other,  ren- 
dering them  perfectly  unmanageable.  This  habit 
arises  either  from  too  sharp,  or  from  too  broad  a 
curb- chain,  or  one  that  mounts  up  out  of  the  chin- 
groove  to  the  sensitive  ends  of  the  jawbones.  This 
habit,  if  once  acquired,  is  a  very  dangerous  one,  as 
such  horses  are  very  apt  to  run  away.  They  need  a 
bit  with  the  lower  branches  in  the  shape  of  a  re- 
versed capital  S.  Lip-straps  are  sometimes  used, 
but  with  doubtful  effect. 

To  overcome  these  difficulties  I  constructed,  a  few 
years  ago,   a  combination  bit,  according  to  the  given 


140  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE, 

dimensions  of  mouthpiece  and  side  branches,  and 
had  attached  to  it  on  the  upper  part  of  the  port  a 
short  movable  spoon  of  four  inches  long,  and  one  and 
one-fourth  inches  wide,  fitting  exactly  the  tongue- 
channel.  This  bit  has  been  tried  by  several 
authorities  in  riding,  especially  on  fractious  horses, 
and  found  to  work  admirably.     Fig.  24. 

In  fact  all  saddle  and  single  carriage  horses  ought 
to  have  that  spoon  attached  to  their  bits,  as  they 
like  to  play  with  their  tongue  at  the  same,  thus 
rendering  them  light  in  hand,  and,  therefore,  at  all 
times  under  control,  at  the  same  time  preventing 
their  putting  the  tongue  over  the  bit.  The  upper 
branches  are  bent  outward,  so  as  to  fit  any  shape 
of  head.  In  cases,  where  it  is  desirable  to  allow 
the  horse  a  firmer  leaning  on  the  bit,  than  is 
necessary  for  road-riding,  as,  for  instance,  for 
hunting,  a  shorter  bit  may  be  used,  which  we  may 
call  dumpy  hit.  The  upper  branch  to  be  exactly  of 
the  described  dimension,  viz :  one  and  three-fourth 
inches,  but  the  lower  branch,  instead  of  being  double 
the  length,  only  to  be  two  and  three-fourths  to  three 
inches  long. 

For  small  horses  of  15  hands  and  less,  and  for 
ponies,  the  dimensions  of  one  and  three-fourths  and 
three  and  one-half  for  the  upper  and  lower  branches 
must  be  reduced  to  one  and  one-half  inches  for  up- 


BITS   AND   BITTING.  141 

per,  and  three  inches  for  lower  branch,  the  other 
equally  important  dimension,  the  transversal  width 
of  mouth,  must  be  ascertained  by  measurement. 

For  pairs,  mouthpieces  with  ports  are  only  then 
advisable,  if  the  bits  fit  the  width  of  the  horses' 
mouths  perfectly  ;  because,  if  the  coupling  reins  are 
short,  as  is  often  the  case,  the  bit  is  displaced 
in  the  mouth  by  force  and  the  edges  of  the  port 
would  invariably  cut  holes  into  the  bars  of  the 
mouth.  With  long  coupling  reins,  reaching 
back  almost  to  the  hand  of  the  driver,  as  it 
ought  to  be,  this  evil  is  lessened,  the  same  time 
enabling  the  driver  to  adjust  the  reins,  if  necessary, 
from  the  box  without  dismounting — the  port,  with  or 
without  spoon,  is  perfectly  admissable.  Any  bit- 
maker  will  furnish  said  bits  if  dimensions  are  given. 

It  is  to  call  the  attention  of  those  who  love  and 
esteem  a  horse  to  the  unpardonable  injuries  done 
our  dumb  friends,  that  I  beg  to  submit  these  my  ob- 
servations and  views  on  the  subject.  I  sincerly  hope 
they  may  accomplish  their  object — that  of  alleviating 
the  suffering  of  some  of  them,  and,  thereby  render- 
ing them  more  serviceable  to  their  owners. 


SADDLES    AND    SADDLING. 

It  is  not  the  intention  to  discuss  all  the  different 
kinds  of  saddles  in  use,  as  the  English  or  park 
saddle,  the  army,  the  school,  the  racing,  or  the 
cowboy  saddle.  They  all  have  their  advantages, 
according  to  their  different  purposes.  The  object 
is  to  compare  the  two  different  kinds  of  park  riding 
saddles,  which  we  see  in  daily  use .  They  do  not 
differ  much  in  outward  appearances.  It  is  the 
skeleton,  or  the  tree,  that  decides  their  merits,  viz : 
the  ivooden,  or  the  leathei^  tree,  making  all  the 
difference  in  the  world,  not  only  to  the  rider,  but, 
also,  to  the  horse. 

"  The  ivooden  tree  saddle,"  as  may  be  inferred  from 
its  name,  is  entirely  unelastic,  and,  as  long  as  that 
uuyielding  piece  of  horse  furniture  happens  to  fit  the 
horse's  back,  it  may  work  tolerably  well.  But  the 
horse  may  change  in  condition,  losing  flesh  for 
instance.  This  wooden  unyielding  tree  cannot 
adapt  itself  to  the  altered  circumstances,  and  the 
so-much  dreaded  catastrophe  is  at  hand.  There  is 
a  hole  in  the  steed's  back,  and  both  horse  and 
rider  get  an  involuntary  vacation.  The  saddle  then 
goes  to  the  saddlemaker  for  repairs,  but  no  amount 

142 


SADDLES  AND  SADDLING.  143 

of  re-stuffing  can  make  an  elastic  saddle  out  of  it. 
One  may  say :  "  We  cannot  afford  to  keep  two  or 
three  saddles  for  each  liorse.  It  is  the  business 
of  the  groom  to  see  to  it  that  it  fits.  He  knows 
all  about  it."     Well,  he  may  or  he  may  not. 

Now,  let  us  investigate  the  second  kind  of  saddle 
with  "  the  elastic  leather  tree."'  This  kind  of  saddle 
fits  any  horse's  back,  and  is  made  so  solid  as  to  last 
three  generations,  and  thousands  of  horsemen 
testify  to-day  to  their  unsurpassed  qualities.  This 
kind  of  saddle  answers  its  purpose  in  every  way. 
The  yielding  and  elastic  leather  tree  accommodates 
itself  at  all  times  to  the  shape  of  the  horse's  back. 
It  fits  by  its  elasticity  and  is  not  liable  to  produce 
sores.  The  rider  in  the  saddle,  the  whole  under 
surface  bears  equally  upon  the  back,  and,  therefore, 
for  long  rides,  or,  for  those  riding  in  English 
style,  these  saddles  do  not  have  their  equal — 
not  only  saving  the  horse's  back  from  harm,  but 
also,  giving  comfort  to  the  rider,  as  they  afford 
a  softer  feeling  for  the  seat  than  the  wooden  tree 
ever  can.  As  to  the  upper  surface  of  both  kinds  of 
saddles,  it  is  plain  that  we  ride  more  comfortably  on 
an  elastic  than  on  an  un-elastic  surface,  the  more  so, 
as  the  seat  of  the  leather-tree  saddle  is  lightly 
stuffed,  breaking  the  rebound  considerably  in  favor 
of  the  rider. 


144  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

As  to  the  absolute  weight  and  size  of  the  saddles, 
the  lighter  it  is,  the  better  for  the  horse,  though  there 
are  certain  limits,  depending  entirely  on  the  build  of 
the  rider.  Heavy  weight  needs  a  large  under  sur- 
face, and  thereby  the  saddle  becomes  heavier. 
Ladies  saddles  are  generally  heavier  than  gentlemen's 
saddles,  on  account  of  the  fair  rider's  side-seat,  re- 
quiring a  larger  under  surface.  As  a  rule,  our  ladies' 
saddles  are  altogether  too  massive.  Every  ounce  of 
unnecessary  weight  ought  to  be  avoided,  as  it  will 
tell  on  the  horse,  which  oftentimes  is  of  very  light 
build. 

The  jockey  rides  a  saddle  as  small  and  light  as 
possible,  knowing  quite  well  that  every  ounce  of 
overweight  will  influence  the  speed  of  his  horse, 
short  as  the  trial  is.  Why  should  this  not  also  hold 
good  for  ladies'  saddles  ? 

The  importance  of  this  seems  to  be  now  fully 
understood,  for  some  manufacturers  are  at  present 
constructing  a  decidedly  lighter  ladies'  saddle,  with 
a  large  opening  over  the  withers,  so  as  to  avoid  all 
possibility  of  bruisiug.  The  difference  in  weight  be- 
tween the  old  and  the  new  kind  of  saddles  is  from 
eight  to  twelve  pounds.  On  this  saddle,  the  equestri- 
enne sits  close  to  her  horse's  back,  and  her  bridle  hand 
is^  therefore,  lower  down,  permitting  a  pull  on  the 
reins   straight  back  in   n.   direction  parallel  to  the 


SADDLES  AND   SADDLING.  145 

horse's  spine,  which  alone  will  reach  the  haunches 
of  the  horse.  With  the  old  saddle  she  sits  too  high 
above  her  horse,  which  produces  a  feeling  of  in- 
security, and  the  pull  on  the  reins  does  not  reach  the 
horse's  hind  quarters,  but  goes  upward  into  the  air, 
one  reason  for  the  helplessness  of  a  woman  when  her 
horse  gets  fractious. 

Nothing  can  be  said  about  the  shape  of  the  upper 
surface  of  gentlemen's  saddles,  as  that  depends 
wholly  upon  the  size  of  the  rider  ;  the  same  is  the 
case  with  the  covering  —  buckskin  or  hogskin  — 
kneepuffs,  or  none,  these  things  being  mere  matters 
of  taste,  though  buckskin,  on  account  of  its  rough 
surface,  affords  the  rider  a  firmer  hold  on  the  saddle, 
and  for  riding  green  or  fractious  horses,  it  may  be 
of  advantage. 

Saddle  cloths  are  now  very  seldom  in  use,  though 
wrongly.  The  reason  may  be  that  those  in  present 
use  never  gave,  nor  could  they  give  any  satisfaction. 
The  object  of  the  saddle  cloth  is,  to  protect  the  stuff- 
ing of  the  saddle  from  becoming  hard  and  lumpy 
from  the  perspiration  of  the  horse,  and,  to  save  the 
iron  parts  inside  the  saddle  from  rusting  and  break- 
ing. They  are  usually  made  of  felt  or  leather.  The 
felt  cloth,  as  long  as  it  is  new,  fills  its  purpose  pretty 
well,  as  it  forms  a  soft  layer  between  the  horse's 
back  and  the  saddle,  but,  as  soon  as  it  gets  soaked 


146  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

with  perspiration,  it  becomes  hard,  irritating  the 
horse's  back,  and  producing  sores,  and  then  it  is 
worse  than  no  cloth.  The  leather  cloth  has  the  dis- 
advantage of  not  absorbing  the  sweat,  which,  finding 
no  escape,  w^ill,  and  must  accumulate  as  a  slimy 
mass  upon  the  back,  irritating  the  back,  and,  very- 
likely,  producing  sores  and  pimples. 

The  only  saddle  doth  of  real  merit  is  the  "Excel- 
sior," the  upper  surface  of  which,  is  of  fine  yellow 
felt,  of  the  color  of  the  saddle.  The  under  sur- 
face, coming  in  contact  with  the  horse's  back, 
consists  of  the  finest  knitted  wool,  with  ridges 
w^oven  in  it,  running  from  front  to  rear,  thereby  ad- 
mitting a  free  circulation  of  air.  Where  there  is  air, 
there  is  no  friction.  Another  feature  is,  that  this 
fine  w^ool  fastens  itself  in  the  hair  of  the  horse's 
back,  thereby  preventing  the  saddle  from  slipping 
forward.  This  latter  fact  is  quite  important  for 
hunting  men,  and  all  those,  whose  horses  are  inclined 
to  curve  up  their  back  after  mounting,  often- 
times the  result  of  too  tight  girthing,  or  sensitive- 
ness of  the  back,  thereby  shifting  the  saddle  and 
rider  forward  upon  the  withers.  So,  also,  with  horses 
of  low  withers  and  with  plungers.  With  this  saddle 
cloth,  slipping  will  never  happen,  and,  when  the  sad- 
dle is  taken  off,  after  a  hard  ride  in  warm  weather, 
the  horse's  back  will  be  found  nearly  dry,  on  account 


SADDLES  AND  SADDLING.  147 

of  these  ridges.  With  these  saddle  cloths  on,  there 
is  no  need  of  severe  girthing,  as  the  saddle  cannot 
slip.  These  saddle  cloths  are  cut  exactly  in  the 
shape  of  the  saddle,  and  having  the  same  color, 
look  very  neat,  besides  saving  the  saddle  and  the 
horse's  back. 

Girths  are  made  of  all  kinds  of  material,  such  as 
leather,  hemp,  hair,  etc.,  all  answering  their  respective 
purposes  quite  well,  so  far  as  the  first  saddling  of  the 
horse  is  concerned.  But  the  trouble  begins,  after 
the  horse  has  been  in  motion  for  some  time,  when, 
by  natural  causes,  the  girths  become  loose,  permit- 
ting the  saddle  to  slip  forward,  or  to  turn  side- 
ways. This  is  especially  the  case  with  ladies'  saddles 
on  horses  with  low  withers,  or  flat  and  light  barrels, 
and  we  have  either  to  take  the  risk  of  having  our 
horse's  back  bruised  somewhere,  and  our  safe  seat 
endangered,  or,  are  obliged  to  dismount  on  the  road 
to  readjust  the  saddle. 

A  really  practical  saddle  girth  is  "  Neiu  adjustahle 
saddle  girth,''  which  is  plain,  simple,  and  fits  any 
saddle.  Fig.  25.  The  whole  arrangement  is  on  the 
double  pulley  principle,  and  consists  of  only  one  broad 
girth  in  two  sections,  overlapping  each  other,  and  con- 
nected by  a  pulley.'  About  six  inches  from  these  over- 
lapping ends  are  the  pulleys  in  the  shape  of  a  square 
double  buckle,  laced  together  by  a  strap.   The  outer 


148  Sow  TO  JUDGE  A  SOESE. 

ends  of  the  girth,  provided  with  buckles  like  any 
other  girth,  are  fastened  to  the  saddle  straps,  on 
either  side,  and  the  tightening  of  the  saddle  is  ac- 
complished by  drawing  the  overlapping  ends  over 
each  other  by  the  pulley  strap,  located  on  the  right- 
hand  side  of  the  saddle.  This  arrangement  is  simi- 
lar to  that  of  the  army  saddle,  but  looking  very 
neat,  and  without  the  big  ring  at  the  side,  which  at 
the  best,  must  pinch  the  horse.  This  girth  fits  any 
horse,  big  or  small,  quite  unlike  the  common  girths, 


Fig.  25. 

which  sometimes  happen  to  be  too  long,  or  too  short. 
The  end  of  this  pulley  strap  being  provided  with  a 
buckle,  is  fastened  to  strap  on  the  right  side  of  the 
saddle.  It  can  be  tightened  or  eased  by  the  rider 
without  dismounting  or  even  loosening  his  or  her 
seat  in  the  saddle,  however  troublesome  the  horse 
may  be.  It  makes  the  most  obstinate  horse  as  easy 
as  the  most  tractable  to  girth  up  properly,  and  any 
■woman  or  child  can  easily  adjust  it.     It  is  equally 


SADDLES  AND  SADDLINC^.  149 

desirable  for  all  riding  saddles,  hunting,  polo,  park, 
military,  ladies',  or  cliildren's.  For  ladies,  particu- 
larly in  the  hunting  field,  as  also  for  horses  having 
to  turn  out  shortly  after  feeding,  it  is  simply  invalu- 
able, quite  especially  for  cavalry,  doing  away 
with  the  necessity  of  very  tight  girthing  at  the  start, 
sometimes  so  dangerous  for  rider  and  horse.  There 
is  another  kind  of  girth  made  of  braided  cord,  which 
is  very  durable,  and  prevents  the  slipping  of  the  sad- 
dle, as  it  fastens  itself  in  the  hair. 

In  stirrups,  there  is  a  great  variety  in  shape  and 
weight.  Leaving  shape  as  a  matter  of  taste  out  of 
consideration,  we  find  three  kinds  of  gentlemen's 
stirrups,  the  light,  the  heavy,  and  the  safety  stirrup. 
The  light  stirrup  should  only  be  used  for  racing 
purposes,  or  by  boys ;  for  gentlemen  it  is  a  rather 
dangerous  stirrup,  as,  on  account  of  its  lightness,  it 
is  very  apt  to  slip  back  on  the  foot,  and  in  case  of 
the  rider  losing  his  balance  in  the  saddle,  it  is  very 
difficult  to  disengage  the  foot  quick  enough,  and  a 
serious  accident  may  be  the  result.  Or,  the  rider 
holding  the  stirrup  with  the  ball  of  the  foot,  they 
slip  off  in  front  very  easily,  flying  around  in  all 
directions,  and  it  is  very  difficult  to  re-catch  them 
again. 

Not  so  the  heavy  stirrup,  which,  by  its  weight,  offers 
■^ore  stability  and  safety  for  the  foot.     It  is   easily 


150  HOW   TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

caught  when  lost,  and  is  not  so  apt  to  slip  back  as 
the  former. 

The  safety  stirrup  seems  to  be  the  best,  for  being 
heavy  and  opening  on  one  side,  it  may  become  a 
life  preserver  in  case  of  an  accident. 

In  ladies'  stirrups  there  are  also  different  kinds — 
the  slipper,  which  is  perfectly  safe,  though  easily 
lost,  and  a  clumsy  affair ;  the  Victoria,  about  the 
worst  and  most  dangerous  stirrup  in  existence,  as, 
through  its  being  padded  all  around,  it  becomes 
too  narrow,  even  for  the  smallest  foot.  If  button 
boots  are  worn,  the  buttons  are  caught  by  the 
padding,  and,  in  case  of  a  fall,  the  rider  may  not 
be  able  to  disengage  her  foot  quickly  enough.  There 
are  several  kinds  of  safety  stirrups,  of  which  the 
"  Reliance  "  seems  to  be  the  best,  as  it  is  really  re- 
liable. It  is  a  double  stirrup,  a  small  one  inside  a 
larger  one.  The  foot  is  placed  in  the  inner  stirrup, 
and  in  case  of  a  fall,  this  inner  stirruj)  turns  around 
thereby  opening  the  foot-blade  and  the  foot  drops 
out. 

In  saddling  a  horse,  the  first  question  arising  is, 
where  is  the  proper  place  for  the  saddle  ?  The  con- 
struction of  the  horse's  shoulder  is  our  only  and 
unalterable  guide,  and  we  cannot,  with  impunity,  go 
back  on  that,  as  the  result  would  be,  sooner  or  later, 
weak-kneed  horses,  or  broken  collar-bones. 


SADDLES  AND   SADDLING.  151 

We  all  know  how  desirable,  and  necessary  it  is,  for 
the  comfort  and  safety  of  the  rider,  that  the  horse 
should  have  a  well-shaped  and  oblique  shoulder 
and  high  withers.  This,  combined  with  moderately 
long  and  oblique  pasterns,  will  secure  an  elastic 
and  free  action. 

Now  let  us  examine  how  the  shoulder-blades  are 
attached  to  the  body.  They  are  fastened  to  the 
chest  by  powerful  muscles  and  the  skin,  moving 
in  an  up  and  down  direction,  around  an  axis 
situated  about  four  fingers  below  the  top  of  the 
shoulder,  so  that,  if  the  horse  lifts  his  fore  leg, 
the  short  part  above  that  axis  moves  back  and  down- 
ward, whilst  the  part  below  that  axis  moves  forward 
and  upward,  as  we  can  easily  feel  by  putting  our 
hand  to  the  upper  end  of  the  shoulder-blade. 
The  reverse  takes  place  if  the  horse  puts  his  foot 
down,  and  shifts  the  burden  forward.  That  shows 
us,  that,  if  we  place  the  saddle  right  close  behind  the 
shoulders  (the  horse  standing  still),  and  the  girths 
are  tightened,  the  saddle  must  interfere  with  the 
free  action  of  the  muscles  when  the  horse  is  in  mo- 
tion. The  result  being  short,  stiff,  and  unsafe  steps 
to  the  ruin  of  the  horse's  fore  legs,  and  the  safety  of 
the  rider.  Therefore,  tlte  saddle  should  he  ^j?ace(^ 
about  the  width  of  two  fingers  behind  the  rear  end 
of  shoulder-blade,  so  as  to  secure  a  free  and   safe 


152  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

action  of  the  horse.  Of  course,  a  horse  with  a 
naturally  straight  shoulder,  is  per  se,  not  fit  for  sad- 
dle use,  and  no  amount  of  proper  saddling  can 
prevent,  sooner  or  latter,  a  salto  mortale,  horse,  rider, 
and  all. 

It  is  really  amazing  how  little  most  of  those  in 
charge  of  saddle  horses  understand  these  facts,  of 
which  we  can  daily  convince  ourselves.    * 

The  girths  should  be  placed  directly  under  the 
middle  of  the  saddle  so  as  to  make  the  whole  un- 
der surface  bear  equally  all  over  the  back.  There 
are  generally  three  girth  straps,  two  under  the  mid- 
dle of  the  saddle,  and  one,  more  in  front  as  a  re- 
serve strap.  If  the  girths  are  fastened  to  the  two 
front  straps,  the  pommel  of  the  saddle  will  be 
pressed  down  upon  the  shoulders,  interfering  with 
their  free  action,  very  likely,  galling  the  withers,  and 
the  cantle  of  the  saddle  will  be  in  the  air.  The  rider 
will  slip  forward,  or,  if  he  sits  back  by  force,  the 
girths  must  either  break  or  take  the  wind  out  of  the 
horse.  The  girths  come  too  near  the  fore  legs,  if 
fastened  in  this  manner,  and  the  respiration  of  the 
horse  is  seriously  interfered  with.  Whereas,  if  the 
girths  are  fastened  to  the  two  backstraps,  under  the 
middle  of  the  saddle,  the  horse  will  suffer  no  incon- 
yenience.  That  is  easily  explained  by  comparison.  Let 
ft  person  fasten  a  strap  very  tight  around  his  chest, 


SADDLES  AND  SADDLING.  153 

and  lie  will  soon  find  tliat  unbearable.  All  acrobats 
and  runners,  put  a  strap  around  their  waist,  because  it 
assists  them  in  their  efforts.  The  main  portion  of 
the  lungs  are  enclosed  by  the  chest  (or  by  the  true 
ribs  in  the  horse),  while  the  small  ends  or  the  loops 
of  the  lungs  do  not  need  so  much  room  for  expan- 
sion. Why  should  that  not  be  the  same  with  the 
horse  ? 

Furthermore,  if  the  rider  sits  then  in  the  middle 
of  the  saddle,  the  equilibrium  between  horse  and 
rider  will  be  established.  Or,  if  the  rider  sits  very 
far  back  on  the  loins  of  the  horse — which  loins,  by  the 
way,  are  not  intended  by  nature  to  carry  the  weight 
directly,  a  thing  we  see  practised  very  often  by 
thoughtless  riders,  causing  considerable  pain  to  the 
horse,  as  the  kidneys  are  located  right  underneath 
the  loins — the  saddle  will  tilt  up  in  front,  and  shift 
forward,  the  result,  possibly,  being  a  sore  back. 
Horses,  with  ticklish  backs,  may  resent  such  displace- 
ment of  the  weight  by  kicking  vigorously,  such 
movement  sometimes  followed  by  a  graceful  imitation 
of  the  catapult  on  the  part  of  the  rider. 

The  fastening  of  the  girths  is  seldom  properly 
performed.  Many  people  throw  the  saddle  rudely 
down  upon  the  horse,  as  if  the  latter  were  a  log  of 
wood,  thereby  irritating  many  horses,  especially 
jnares,  to  such  a  degree,  as  to  make  them  jump  in  the 


154  HOW  TO   JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

corner  of  the  stall.  Then  they  take  up  the  first  girth, 
strapping  it  to  suffocation,  then  up  the  second 
girth  in  the  same  way.  Others,  again,  instead  of 
pulling  the  girths  upward,  pull  them  against  the 
horse,  throwing  the  animal  entirely  off  his  feet. 
Many  a  horse  has  been  spoiled  for  lifetime  by  such 
practices,  being  taught  to  kick,  or  bite,  or  swell 
themselves  up  so  as  to  protect  themselves  against 
over-girthing,  the  stupid  groom,  standing  by, 
wondering  at  the  viciousness  of  that  beast. 

The  proper  way,  is  to  put  the  saddle  down  easily 
upon  the  back,  take  up  one  girth  after  the  other, 
fastening  them  loosely,  and  then  tighten  them  grad- 
ually, hole  by  hole,  until  they  are  just  snug  enough 
to  hold  the  saddle  in  its  proper  place.  After  that, 
put  on  the  bridle,  turn  the  horse  around,  back  him 
into  his  stall,  and  tie  him  loosely  on  both  sides, 
until  he  is  wanted.  In  this  way  the  horse  suffers  no 
pain,  and  his  temper  is  not  disturbed.  Finishing 
of  the  girthing  is  done  before  the  rider  mounts. 
Horses  should  not  be  saddled  before  one  hour  and 
a-half  after  feeding,  as  they  need  that  time  for  di- 
gestion ;  but,  in  case  they  have  to  turn  out  sooner, 
the  girths  should  not  be  drawn  very  tight,  as  the  re- 
sult might  be,  especially  with  high-tempered  horses, 
a  rush  of  blood  to  the  brain,  under  circumstances, 
endangering  the  life  of  the  rider. 


SADDLES  AND  SADDLING.  155 

The  stirrups  should  be  hung  just  under  the  seat 
of  the  rider,  as  in  this  position  only,  the  rider  gets  a 
firm  footing  upon  them  and  a  protection  against  slip- 
ping off.  As  a  rule,  we  find  them  attached  too  far 
forward,  giving  the  thigh  an  oblique  direction  for- 
ward, and  the  footing  upon  the  stirrup  will  be  in  a 
diagonal  direction  to  the  seat.  To  establish  his  bal- 
ance, the  rider  is  then  compelled  to  lean  forward, 
sometimes  twisting  his  body  in  the  most  wonderful 
curvatures,  to  the  detriment  of  the  horse's  knees. 
And  in  case  of  the  horse  shying,  kicking,  stopping 
short,  or  wheeling  sharply  around,  etc  ,  it  may  pos- 
sibly be  accompanied  by  a  voyage  of  the  rider  over 
the  horse's  ears,  or  by  a  fall  to  the  side,  all  because 
the  position  of  the  foot  is  in  an  oblique  direction. 

He  who  wishes  to  ride  safely,  and  comfortably, 
should  make  it  a  habit  to  examine,  before  mounting, 
whether  saddle  and  bridle  are  in  proper  position. 


ABOUT  STABLE  DRAINAGE. 

In  the  interest  of  horse  owners,  and  to  promote 
the  health  and  well-being  of  our  most  useful  and 
willing  servants— our  horses— also  to  keep  away 
sickness  from  stables,  the  following  suggestions  for 
the  laying  of  stable  floors  are  submitted  : 

For  a  stall  5  feet  wide  and  9J  feet  long,  the  flooring 
would  be  as  in  cut.  Fig.  25,  showing  the  whole 
arrangement,  and  the  laths,  and  iron  drains,  as 
they  are  joined  together. 

Give  S}^  feet  for  the  front  boards,  laid  cross- 
ways,  then  put  down  a  board  2  inches  thick  on  either 
side  of  the  stall,  6  feet  long,  16  in.  wide,  overreaching 
the  gutter  behind  the  stall  by  about  one  inch,  the 
rest  in  the  middle  is  for  the  laths  and  drains. 

The  laths  ought  to  be  of  hard  wood,  (beechwood 
is  best),  and  rabbetted  3-16  of  an  inch,  so  that  the 
iron  drains  fit  exactly  under  the  laths,  thereby  an 
escape  of  urine  is  made  impossible.  These  laths 
are  6  feet  long,  3  1-2  in.  wide,  and  2  1-2  in.  deep,  and 
rabbetted  from  the  bottom  up  1  1-4  in.  They  are 
fastened  down  to  the  under-flooring  by  long  screws, 
for  the   sake   of  easy   removal,  if  necessary.     The 

156 


ABOUT   STABLE   DHAINAGE. 


157 


head  of  screws  should  be  sunk  down  to  avoid  hurting 
the  horse. 

The  incline  of  the  floor  from  head  to  gutter,  should 


\f> 


i    ^ 


.$  $    tt 


i  ? 


-'f 


>« 

cs 


*--^li 


1 


St 


■ic 


fccttef  -^ 


-^^^ccYC^ 


Fia.  25, 


156  HOW  TO  Junai:  a  house. 

in  no  case  be  more  than  3  inches,  for,  if  steeper,  it 
affects  the  joints  and  loins  of  the  horse. 

The  iron  drains  are  1  1-4  in.  high,  1  in.  wide  inside, 
about  one-eighth  inch  thick,  and  6  feet  long,  and 
closed  at  the  head  end. 

The  urine  flows  off  through  the  iron  drains  into 
the  gutter  behind  the  stalls,  and  from  there  through 
the  conducts  to  the  sewer. 

This  method  of  laying  stable  floors  is  not  uncom- 
mon in  Europe,  and  has,  of  late,  been  introduced  in 
the  new  stables,  built  by  the  Lion  Brewery,  Ninth 
avenue  and  One  Hundred  and  Eighth  street,  New 
York  City,  where  it  gives  complete  satisfaction,  and 
the  cost  is  very  little. 

It  is  a  fact  that,  perhaps  two-thirds  of  our  horses 
are,  after  a  day's  hard  work,  not  only  badly  cared  for, 
but  condemned  to  seek  rest  and  recuperation  in 
stables  unfit  for  any  living  creature,  badly  lighted, 
haidlj  ventilated,  and  worst  of  all,  entirely  inadequately 
drained. 

The  poor  creatures  are  condemned  to  inhale,  dur- 
ing the  whole  night,  the  health-destroying  vapors  of 
a  rotten  floor,  and  bedding  saturated  with  ammonia 
and  all  this  because  the  present  way  of  flooring 
stables  is  altogether  wrong.  This  nuisance  could  be 
easily  removed   by  simply  breaking  the  old  custom. 

An  improvement  in  this  direction  would  be  an  act 


ABOUT   STABLE  DRAINAGE.  159 

of  mercy  and  justice  to  our  faithful  servants,  a  sav- 
ing to  tlieir  owners  by  preserving  tlieir  horses'  health 
and  usefulness,  a  saving  in  straw  and  harness,  and  a 
benefit  to  the  inhabitants  living  near  stables. 

May  this  appeal  to  the  sense  of  justice  of  horse- 
owners,  not  go  unheeded  for  the  sake  of  the  ill- 
judged  saving  of  a  few  dollars.  Every  horse-owner 
can  afford  that  small  outlay. 

Iron  drains  can  be  had  at  any  iron  foundry  at  a 
cost  of  about  fifty  cents  a  piece.  Hard  w^ood  laths 
about  ten  cents  a  piece. 


ABOUT   DKIVING. 

ONE    HORSE    OR    A    PAIR  —  FOUR-IN-HAND     OR     TANDEM. 

Driying  a  Pair. 

The  horses  should  be  properly  matched,  in  every 
point,  properly  bitted  and  harnessed.  They  should 
be  of  the  same  height  and  disposition,  have  the  same 
action,  and  carry  their  heads  alike. 

Keins  and  whip  are  the  means  whereby  the  driver 
communicates  with  his  horses.  Short  sounds  and 
words  complete  the  correspondence  between  them. 
The  right  hand  may  properly  be  called  the  assisting 
hand  ;  first,  because  it  holds  the  whip,  and  gives  the 
summons  to  start ;  second,  because  of  its  assisting 
the  left  hand  in  stopping  and  turning  the  horses,  in 
shortening  and  lengthening  the  reins  held  in  the 
left  hand.  Fig.  26- 

The  left,  or  guiding  hand,  holding  the  left  line  be- 
tween thumb  and  first  finger,  the  right  line  between 
second  and  third  fingers,  should  be  rounded  off 
somewhat  inward,  and  be  carried  with  the  under  arm 
at  right  angles  with  the  upper  arm.  As  in  riding,  the 
wrist  should  be  kept  loose,  not  rigid,  the  hand  stand- 

J60  ^ 


ABOUT  DRIVING. 


161 


ing  quiet  and  being  closed,  so  as  to  prevent  the  reins 
from  slipping  through  the  hand. 

The  manipulations  of  turning,  stepping  back 
and  stopping,  (more  fully  explained  further  on), 
are  accomplished  by  the  right  (assisting)  hand 
grasping  easily  into  the  reins  in  front  of  the  left 
hand.  The  shortening  of  the  reins,  whenever  neces- 
sary, is  carried  out  by  drawing  them  back  from  be- 


FiG.  26. 


hind  the  left  hand ;   the  lengthening^  by  letting  them 
slip  through  the  slightly  opened  fingers  forward. 

The  ^ohip^  or  the  instrument  whereby  the  horses 
should  be  animated  to  step  forward,  similar  to  the 
pressure  of  the  legs,  or  the  application  of  the  spurs 
in  riding,  should  not  be  used  only  for  punishment, 
but,  particularly,  as  a  meaos  to  regulate  the  paces 


162  HOW  TO   JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

to  equalize  the  differences  in  the  temper  of  the 
horses,  and  to  assist  in  the  correctness  of  the 
turns. 

The  driver  should  be  eagerly  bent  on  handling  his 
team  in  an  elegant  manner,  so  pleasing  the  eye  of 
even  the  uninitiated. 

The  hints  loith  the  ivhipy  also  the  lighter  cuts,  and 
lastly  the  punishing  cuts,  must  be  executed  with  a 
flexible  wrist,  hitting  the  horse  from  below  to  upward, 
and,  if  necessary,  be  repeated  with  increased  force. 
The  further  forward  of  the  hindquarters  the  whip  is 
applied,  the  better,  for,  if  administered  far  behind,  it 
might  provoke  some  horses  to  strike  out,  or  kick 
over  the  traces.  Sometimes  the  whip  has  to  be 
used  also  on  the  inside,  for  instance,  with  a  horse 
leaning  against  the  pole,  and  carrying  its  head  too 
far  outward  when  going  up  hill  or  over  heavy 
ground. 

If  it  becomes  necessary  to  punish,  begin  with  light 
cuts  administered  far  forward.  The  driver  should 
be  moderate  in  this  and  never  hit  a  horse  at  the 
wrong  time,  nor  show  the  ruffian  by  thrashing  the 
horse.  To  abuse  high-bred,  spirited  horses,  Dieans 
pouring  oil  into  the  fire,  and  to  show  off  one's  force 
in  thrashing  a  lazy  or  low-spirited  horse,  is  a  con- 
temptible act,  making  at  all  times  a  very  bad  impres- 
sion. High-bred  horses,  punished  at  the  wrong  time, 


ABOUT  DRIVING.  1^3 

will  be  sure  to  bring  the  imprudent  driver  in 
trouble,  sooner  or  later,  if  not  endanger  the  carriage 
and  its  occupants. 

The  gradually  increasing  effect  of  the  whip  upon 
the  horses  removes  their  fear  and  saves  the  occu- 
pants of  the  carriage  unpleasant  jolts  and  jerks, 
brought  about  by  injudicious  and  rude  handling  of 
the  whip.  It  is  not  desirable,  that  horses  be  too 
much  afraid  of  the  whip — jumping  at  the  least 
touch  of  it.  Cajole  them  with  it,  thereby,  you 
will  make  them  accustomed  to  it  and  allay  their 
fear.  An  intelligent  driver  knows  how  to  teach  his 
horses  the  difference  between  hints,  punishment,  and 
cajoling.  If  there  are  occupants  in  the  carriage 
punishment  should  only  be  resorted  to  as  the  last 
thing,  and  even  then,  very  moderately. 

The  correcting  of  the  horses  should  be  done 
during  the  time  of  training,  or  exercising  them,  and 
if  possible,  unobserved,  to  avoid  bad  impressions. 

It  should  be  mentioned  here,  that  many  coachmen 
have  the  very  bad  habit  of  continually  using  the 
whip,  thereby  either  irritating  their  horses,  or 
rendering  them  entirely  unfeeling  and  unable  to 
distinguish  between  hints  and  punishment. 

The  best  appearance  the  driver  on  the  box  always 
presents  is,  if  he  remains  perfectly  quiet  and  straight, 
though  not  rigid,  during  the   many  manipulations, 


164 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 


giving  the  hints  to  his  horses  as  little  perceivablj  as 
possible. 

THE  POSITION  OF  THE  COACHMAN  ON  THE  BOX. 


Fig.  27. 


The  position  of  the  coachman  on  the  box,  should 
be  unconstrained  but  straight,  the  legs  stretched  out 
as  far  as  possible,  to  establish  a  firm  support  for  thQ 


ABOUT  DRIVING.  165 

handling  and  stopping  of  tlie  horse's  toes  and  knees 
close  together,  the  upper  arms  held  down  perpen- 
dicularly, and  close  to  the  body,  forming  at  the  elbow 
a  right  angle  with  the  under  arms ;  the  hands 
straight  with  the  under  arm  and  placed  before  the 
middle  of  the  body  with  the  wrists  slightly  rounded 
off. 

The  reins  are  held  in  the  left  hand  ;  the  left  rein 
on  top,  between  thumb  and  first  finger  ;  the  right  rein 
between  second  and  thhd  fingers. 

Both  reins  should  be  equal  in  length  and  just 
tight  enough  to  feel  the  horses'  mouths,  but  not  too 
tight.  The  whip  should  be  held  in  the  right  hand 
in  an  oblique  direction,  pointing  to  the  left  and  for- 
ward toward  the  ear  of  the  near  horse  ;  the  lower, 
thicker  end  of  the  whip,  according  to  its  length,  ex- 
tending downward  for  a  length  of  about  four  inclies 
below  the  hand.  The  whip-hand  should  be  placed 
near  the  left  hand,  on  the  same  height,  or  slightly 
forward. 

The  well-trained  coachman,  seated  on  the  box, 
shouhl,  in  waiting  before  the  house,  sit  perfectly  still 
and  straight,  avoiding  all  twisting  and  turning  of  his 
body. 

STARTING. 

The  driver,  holding  the  rein-hand  (left)  perfectly 
quiet,  should  give  the  hint  to  his  horses  for  starting 


166  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

in  a  low  hissing  tone,  or  by  the  word  "  come,"  at  the 
same  time  lowering  his  hand  so  as  to  give  them  rein 
enough  to  come  up  to  the  collar,  then  regulate  the 
pace  by  laying  on,  or  touching  with  the  whip.  First 
start  at  a  walk,  and  after  a  few  steps  go  over  into  a 
trot.  If  one,  or  both  horses,  especially  young  ones, 
do  not  start  well,  turn  them  first  a  little  sideways, 
thereby  loosening  the  carriage  from  the  spot,  and 
from  this  sideways  motion  they  will  easier  find  the 
start. 

The  trot  ought  to  be  an  even  one  for  both  horses, 
so  that  neither  of  them  may  be  overtaxed ;  the  lazy 
horse  must  be  brought  up  to  the  bit,  as  otherwise 
he  would  be  favored  at  cost  of  the  other  horse.  It 
is  quite  essential  for  economy  and  appearance 
sake  that  both  horses  should  be  of  the  same  temper. 

On  straight  roads,  and  with  light  vehicles,  it  is 
customary  to  drive  with  one  hand,  the  left  only ; 
but,  under  special  circumstances,  as,  for  instance,  in 
narrow  roads,  in  crowded  thoroughfares,  or  with 
elegant  carriages,  where  style  comes  into  play,  it  is 
advisable  to  use  both  hands  ;  that  means,  hold  both 
reins  in  the  left  hand  ;  the  right  in  front,  or  near  the 
left,  so  as  to  be  always  prepared  for  a  sudden  turn- 
ing out  or  a  stop.  At  all  times  keep  your  horses 
well  up  to  the  reins,  for  if  one  of  them  goes  behind 
the  rein,  the  pace  must  become  uneven. 


ABOUT  DEIYING.  167 


STOPPING. 


The  passing  over  from  a  trot  to  a  walk,  or  to  a 
halt,  should,  if  circumstances  do  not  demand  a  short 
stop,  be  made  gradually,  so  as  to  prevent  the  horses 
from  slipping — especially  on  pavement — as  also  to 
protect  the  occupants  of  the  carriage  from  getting 
jolted.  In  driving  with  one  hand,  turn  your  left 
hand  inward  and  upward,  the  little  finger  mounting 
upward  toward  the  body,  thereby  effectuating  a  pull 
on  the  lines.  A  stylish  driver  will  never  be  seen 
lifting  his  arms  up,  or  taking  them  back,  or  turning 
out  his  elbows.  Throwing  back  the  body  is  only 
admissible  as  a  support  in  case  of  an  unexpected 
sharp  stop  becoming  necessary.  In  that  case  it 
is  preferable  to  grasp  with  the  right  hand  into  the 
reins  in  front  of  the  left ;  the  right  hand  beiug 
generally  the  stronger,  by  drawing  back  the  lines,  a 
stop  will  be  effectuated.  The  whip  must  be  in  readi- 
ness, so  that,  in  case  the  hands  having  acted  too 
sharp,  a  touch  of  the  whip  will  bring  the  horses 
up  to  the  bit  again. 

BACKING. 

Both  horses  should  step  back  alike,  on  a  straight 
line,  assisted  by  familar  pulls  on  the  lines,  placing 
the  carriage  in  an  oblique  position  thereby  being 
avoided.      The  horses  should  not  be  permitted  to 


168  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

hurry  backward,  but  step  for  step.  Lines  and  wMp 
must  assist  eacli  other.  If  one  horse  gets  fixed,  and 
refuses  to  back— frequently  the  case  with  young  or 
not  sufficiently  trained  horses — the  coachman  must 
loosen  it  first  by  light  touches  of  the  whip^ 
then,  as  soon  as  one  or  two  legs  begin  to  move,  the 
horse  will  yield  immediately  to  the  renewed  pulls 
on  the  reins.  Backing  in  a  small  space,  or  in  nar- 
row passages,  for  the  purpose  of  giving  the  carriage 
some  other  direction,  must  be  done,  very  carefully, 
by  turning  the  horses  on  the  spot  toward  that  side 
where  the  hindpart  of  the  carriage  is  intended  to  be 
placed. 

For  instance,  you  are  compelled  to  drive  up  to  a 
house-door  upon  your  left  hand  side,  the  street  be- 
ing blocked  up  by  other  carriages,  and  you  see  no 
other  chance  but  to  back  your  carriage  in  to  the  door. 
Turn  your  horses  to  the  left,  as  far  as  there  is  room 
to  do  so,  let  them  then  step  back  so  far  until  your 
left  hind  wheel  reaches  the  spot  where  you 
intend  to  place  the  carriage  ;  then,  swing  your 
horses  slowly  to  the  right,  the  same  as  you  turned 
them  before  to  the  left ;  let  them  back  slowly,  which 
will  bring  the  left  fore  wheel  to  the  desired  spot  in 
front  of  the  hind  wheel,  and  finally  turn  your  horses 
straight  before  the  carriage,  and  you  are  at  the  in- 
tended place. 


ABOtJT  DRmNG.  169 

To  execute  a  sliort  turn  about  on  the  sjDot  is  still 
more  difficult.  At  the  first  turn  sideways,  swing  your 
horses  around  carefully  and  so  sharp,  that  they 
come  to  stand  at  nearly  right  angles  to  the  carriage, 
taking  care  not  to  move  the  hind  wheels  from  the 
spot;  then  back  and,  at  the  same  time,  turn  your 
horses  in  the  opposite  direction,  thereby  bringing  the 
carriage  into  the  new  or  opposite  direction.  All 
changes  of  direction  of  this  kind,  should  be  executed 
with  great  calmness  and  carefulness,  and  never  by 
jerking  and  rude  whipping,  as  then  the  purpose 
could  never  be  reached,  and  the  carriage  might  be- 
come damaged. 

In  winter  time,  if  the  horses  are  sharpened,  it  is 
better  to  avoid,  if  possible,  all  similar  sharp  turns, 
as  the  horses  are  very  apt  to  hurt  themselves  seri- 
ously. 

TURNING. 

In  breaking  in  young  horses,  or,  in  driving  in 
crowded  thoroughfares,  it  is  advisable  to  drive  with 
two  hands,  that  is:  take  in  each  hand,  the  correspond- 
ing rein,  or  else,  the  left  hand  holdiug  both  reins, 
must  be  assisted  by  the  right.  To  all  turns  the  im- 
pulse is  given  by  the  right  hand,  and  as  this  is  also 
holding  the  whip,  it  has  to  animate  one  or  the  other 
horse,  so  as  to  support  the  pull  on  the  reins,  and  to 


m 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 


keep  up  the  pace.  While  the  left  hand  is  holding 
the  reins  in  the  described  position,  the  right  hand, 
before  beginning  any  change  of  direction,  will  grasp 
into  both  lines  over  and  in  front  of  the  left,  and,  by- 
gathering  the  horses,  prepares  them  for  the  turn  ;  and 


Fig.  28. 

then,  taking  hold  of  the  inner  rein  with  the  first  and 
second,  or  second  and  third  fingers,  gives  the  impulse 
for  turning.  Fig.  28.  With  well  broken  horses,  a 
light  pressure  upon  the  rein  being  sufficient,  the 
same  must  be  increased,  with  not  sufficiently  trained, 
or  sluggish  or  spoiled  horses,  until  it  takes  effect. 
First  give  the  hint  to  the  inside  horse,  which  has  to 
b  gin  the  turning,  and  finish  the  same  by  alternate, 
UK.ie  (^r  le  s,  strong  and  repeated  pulls,  at  the  same 


ABOUT  DEIYING.  Hi 

time,  shifting  tlie  left  hand  slightly  forward,  so  as  to 
give  more  rein  to  the  other  horse;  both  horses  assisted 
bj  the  whip.  There  is  for  instance,  a  stronger  effect 
necessary  on  the  outside  horse,  after  the  turn  is 
finished,  to  bring  both  horses  up  to  the  bit,  and 
into  the  new  direction.  It  is  a  well-known  fact, 
that  broken  horses  are  inclined  to  go  too  quick  and 
too  short  into  the  turns  ;  the  whip  has,  therefore, 
first  to  drive  the  i aside  horse  easy  into  the  reins, 
and  to  watch  over  it,  that  the  traces  of  the  inside 
horse  first  brmg  the  wagon.  The  outside  horse, 
having  the  longest  distance  to  travel,  must  in  case  of 
his  hanging  back  (oftentimes  caused  by  the  driver 
omitting  to  give  the  outside  horse  sufficient  rein  by 
shifting  the  left  hand  a  little  forward),  be  brought 
up  to  the  bit,  by  touching  him  on  the  inside.  In 
short,  with  lines  and  whip,  an  experienced  coachman 
will  execute  a  correct  turn. 

TO    TUEN    TO   THE    LEFT. 

Put  the  right  hand  over  the  left,  take  hold  of  the 
left  rein  and  pull  it  backward,  lift  the  thumb  of  the 
left  hand,  and  close  it  down  upon  the  loop  formed 
by  the  rein,  and  after  the  turn  is  made,  let  the  loop 
slip  forward  again  through  the  hand.  The  left  hand 
alone    should  make  all  turns,   so   as  to    leave   the 


172  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

right  hand  free  for  the  use  of  the  whip.  As  soon 
as  the  near  horse  has  received  the  impulse  for  the 
turn  bj  the  line,  it  must  be  animated  into  the  turn 
with  the  whip,  so  as  to  bring  the  carriage,  that  is  to 
pull  the  same  by  the  traces  into  the  new  direction. 

Inexperienced  drivers  generally  give  the  impulse 
for  the  turn  to  the  left,  by  pulling  the  left  rein, 
closely  followed  by  an  animation  of  the  off  horse. 
The  consequence  is  that  the  off  horse  throws 
himself  against  the  pole,  and  the  pole  against  the 
near  horse,  compelling  the  latter  to  fall  out  with 
shoulder  and  body,  thereby  preventing  him  from 
pulling.  The  rules  for  driving  one  horse  or  a  pair 
are  generally  the  same. 

In  turning  to  the  rights  place  the  right  hand  full 
upon  the  rein. 

DRIVING    FOUR-IN-HAND. 

The  first  requirement  is  an  exact  knowledge  of  how 
to  handle  the  lines,  and  calmly  to  guard  and  regu- 
late the  paces  of  the  horses. 

There  are  several  ivays  of  holding  the  reins  in  the 
left  hand,  the  first  being :  Take  up  the  lines  of  the 
wheelers  into  your  right  hand,  the  left  line  between 
first  and  second  fingers,  the  right,  between  second 
and  third  fingers,  and  equal  them  out.  Then  take 
the  lines  of  your  leaders  into  your  left  hand,  and 


ABOUT  DRIVING. 


173 


equal  them  out ;  then  shift  them  over  into  your 
right  hand,  so  that  the  line  of  the  nearside 
leader  rests  between  thumb  and  first  finger,  and  the 
line  of  the  off-side  leader,  between  first  and  second 
fingers  and  on  top  of  the  rein  of  the  near-side  wheeler. 


Fig.    29 


Mount  the  box  with  the  assistance  of  your  left  hand, 
and  when  seated,  transfer  all  four  reins  over  to  the 
left  hand,  in  the  same  order  as  you  held  them  in 
your  right  hand,  equalize  them,  take  the  whip  into 
your  right  hand,  and  you  are  ready  to  start. 

The  right  hand,  so  as  to  be  ready  for  any  emer- 
gency, should  be  placed  a  little  forward  of  the  left 


174  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 

hand,  leaning  against  the  lines,  and  acting  from  there 
on  all  four  lines. 

Close  the  left  hand  fully,  so  as  to  prevent  any- 
lengthening  out  or  entanglement  of  the  lines,  be- 
cause you  have  four  horses  before  you,  and  one 
pull  on  the  wron^  line  may  throw  the  whole  team  in 
confusion.  The  whip  should  be  held  as  in  driving  a 
pair.  Should  it  become  necessary  to  shorten  the 
lines,  grasp  the  ends  of  the  reins  hanging  down  from 
the  left,  with  the  right  hand,  either  slipping  the 
left  hand  a  little  forward,  or  pulling  the  lines  down- 
ward through  the  left  hand.  Keep  in  mind,  that 
those  lines  which  become  too  long,  must  be  pulled 
through  the  hand  backward,  while  those  which  be- 
come too  short,  must  be  allowed  to  slip  through 
forward. 

If,  during  driving,  you  have  to  lengthen  out,  or  to 
shorten  one  or  the  other  line,  grasp  the  same  with 
two  fingers  of  the  right  hand ;  for  lengthening  out  in 
front  of  the  left  hand,  and  for  shortening  behind  the 
same,  pull  them  forward  or  backward. 

To  start  correctly  with  four  horses,  it  is  essential, 
that  all  four  should  stand  straight  in  the  lines,  and 
the  leaders  start  a  moment  before  the  wheelers.  A 
rushing  forward  of  the  wheelers  must  be  carefully 
prevented,  to  avoid  their  running  into  the  leaders, 
possibly  followed  by  kicking  and  entanglement  in 


ABOUT  DRIVING.  175 

the  traces,  and  by  general  disorder.  In  all  paces, 
turns  or  short  stops,  the  wheelers  should  be  held  a 
little  shortened  by  the  right  hand,  to  prevent  col- 
lision with  the  leaders. 

In  general,  the  wheelers  are  the  real  draught 
horses  of  a  four-in-hand  ;  the  leaders,  commonly  of 
lighter  build,  are  more  of  an  appendage,  their  pull- 
ing amounting  to  little.  Driving  four-in-hand  must 
be  classed  under  the  luxuries,  and,  performed  by  a 
stylish  driver,  presents  a  most  beautiful  aspect. 
The  equalness  of  the  tension  of  the  traces  and  lines 
is  a  prime  factor.  If,  unintentionally,  the  team 
should  deviate  from  the  straight  line,  the  oblique 
direction  must  be  corrected  principally  by  the 
wheelers. 

Before  stopping  a  four-in-hand,  the  coachman  has 
to  examine  if  all  four  lines  are  in  equal  tension, 
and  then  begin  reining  in  the  wheelers  first,  imme- 
diately followed  by  that  of  the  leaders. 

In  hacking^  first  let  the  leaders  step  back  a  little, 
and  as  soon  as  they  begin  the  motion,  pull  back  the 
wheelers ;  if  reversed,  the  wheelers  would  find  re- 
sistance from  the  leaders. 

Turns  are  executed  in  a  similar  way  as  in  driving 
a  pair,  but  with  the  difference  that  the  fore  lines 
have  to  act  first. 

Never  turn  the  leaders  too  sharp,  or  too  sudden — a 


176  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

mistake  generally  made  by  beginners — considering 
that  by  doing  so,  the  leaders  coming  into  an  an- 
gular position  to  the  wheelers,  the  direction  must 
become  a  broken  one.  The  leaders  should  only  re- 
ceive a  slight  hint  for  a  change  of  direction,  and  step 
only  gradually  into  the  new  line  of  travel,  so  as  to 
enable  the  wheelers  and  the  coach  to  follow  in  their 
tracks.  For  this  reason,  begin  all  turns  in  good 
time,  and  gradually,  especially  in  narrow  streets, 
etc. 

Turning  to  the  right.  Take  hold  of  the  right  fore 
line  with  your  right  hand,  and  give  the  offside  leader 
the  hint  to  turn  gradually,  at  the  same  moment,  the 
right  hand  grasps  the  line  of  the  nearside  wheeler, 
causing  him  to  step  diagonally  to  the  left,  so  as  to 
follow  in  the  tracks  of  the  leaders  just  swinging  over 
to  the  right ;  the  right  hand  wheeler,  whose  part  it 
is  to  bring  the  vehicle,  must  be  animated  into  the 
turn  by  the  whip.  Move  your  left  hand  slightly 
forward,  to  enable  the  left  leader  to  follow  the  right 
hand  leader.  As  soon  as  the  leaders  are  in  the  new 
direction,  the  pull  on  the  right  fore  line  must  cease, 
and  only  the  wheelers,  but,  merely  by  hint,  must  be 
led  into  the  new  direction.  After  all  four  horses  are 
in  the  new  line  of  travel,  the  pull  on  the  different 
lines  ceases,  and  the  latter  are  equalled  out  to  keep 
the  horses  in  a  straight  direction.     Turning  to  the 


ABOUT  DRIVING.  177 

left  is  accomplished  in  the  contrary  way ;  the  circular 
and  short  turns  are  executed  in  the  same  way,  always 
bearing  in  mind  that  the  wheelers  have  to  follow  in 
the  tracks  of  the  leaders,  and  should  never  be  jerked 
at  the  same  time  iuto  the  intended  directions. 

In  putting  together  a  four  -  in  -  hand,  always 
see  to  it,  that  the  wheelers  are  the  heavier 
horses,  and  at  the  same  time,  quieter  in  temper. 
The  left  leader  should  be  an  active,  intelligent  horse 
and  well -broken.  This  is  of  special  advantage  and 
value  in  driving  from  the  box.  Yery  properly  this 
horse  is  called  the  leader  of  the  four-in-hand. 

Before  putting  the  four  horses  together,  it  is  ad- 
visable to  exercise  them  first  in  pairs,  so  as  to  take 
out  all  friskiness  and  unevenness  in  the  paces. 

In  going  doiun  Mil,  the  wheelers  alone,  have  to  hold 
back  the  coach,  but  care  should  be  taken  to  pre- 
vent the  leaders  from  hurrying  forward,  or  from 
hanging  back,  as  in  the  latter  case,  the  pole,  or  the 
leadbars,  might  touch  them,  and  the  traces  become 
too  loose. 

In  going  up  hill,  let  the  leaders  do  their  share  in 
pulling. 

The  handling  of  a  four  -  in  -  hand  is  very  diffi- 
cult, and  needs  much  practising.  The  whip,  on 
account  of  its  length,  is  sometimes  very  much  in  the 
way,  and  after  each  use,  the  lash  should  be  caught 


178 


HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HOESE. 


up  by  the  hand.  The  wheelers  are  to  be  animated 
by  the  gathered  whip ;  the  leaders  by  the  lash. 
To  do  the  latter  properly,  that  is,  to  hit  the  desired 
spot,  or  even  the  respective  horse,  is  not  an  easy 
matter. 


'fy'' 


Fig  30. 


Another  way  to  arrange  the  four  lines  in  the  left 
hand,  is  as  follows  : 

(a.)     The  line  of  the  left  leader  between  thumb 

and  first  finger. 
(6.)     The  line  of  the  left  wheeler  between  first 

and  second  fingers." 
(c.)     The  line  of  the  right  leader  between  second 

and  third  fingers. 
(d)     The  fine  of  the  right  wheeler  between  third 

and  little  or  fourth  fingers. 


ABOUT  DRIVING.  170 

lu  this  way  there  is  a  line  between  each  two  fin- 
gers ;  the  lines  of  the  left  side  (near)  horses  being  the 
two  upper  ones,  and  the  lines  of  the  right  side  (off) 
horses,  the  two  lower  ones. 

For  breaking-in  young  horses  this  way  of  arrang- 
ing the  reins  may  be  of  advantage,  as  in  case  of 
emergency  the  reins  of  the  rightside  horses  are 
easily  transferred  over  to  the  right  hand. 

TANDEM  DRIVING. 

Tandem  driving  requires  as  much,  if  not  more, 
dexterity  as  driving  four-in-hand.  Select  for  this 
purpose,  safe,  lively  but  never  excitable  horses,  the 
leader  to  be  a  horse  that  does  not  shy,  so  as  not  to 
disturb  the  driving  direction  by  starting  sideways. 
Horses  used  to  go  single  are  the  best  for  the  pur- 
pose. 

Manipulations  and  holding  the  lines  are  the  same 
as  in  driving  four-in-hand. 

Concerning  the  hitching,  let  the  traces  of  the 
leader  be  a  little  longer,  as  in  four-in-hand.  These 
latter  are  either  fastened  to  the  shafts,  or  to  the 
traces  of  the  shaft  horse,  and  held  up  by  two 
straps,  attached  to  the  collar  of  the  shaffc 
horse.  The  shaft  horse  should  be  hitched  firm  and 
short,  and  should  be  checked  up.  The  leader  may 
go  unchecked. 


180  HOW  TO  JUDGE  A  HORSE. 

Rules  for  driving,  especially  for  turning,  stopping, 
etc.,  are  the  same  as  for  four-in-liand  driving.  The 
driver  must  take  care  that  both  horses  travel  on  a 
straight  line,  and  are  well  up  to  the  bit,  and  in 
the  traces. 


THE  END. 


WILLIAM   R.  JENKINS' 

GBTflLOIlUE  OF  VETEBIIIIIBY  BOOKS 

1903 


(*)  Single  asterisk  designates  New  Books. 
{**)  Double  asterisk  designates  Recent  Publications. 


ANDERSON,  "Vice  in  tlie  Horse"  and  olher  papers 
on  Horses  and  Riding.  By  E.  L.  Anderson.  Demy, 
8vo,  cloth .' 2  00 

—  "  How  to  Ride  and  Scliool  a  Horse."  Witti  a  System 
of  Horse  Gymnastics.  By  Edward  L.  Anderson. 
Cr.  8vo 1  00 

ABJISTEAD.      "Tlie  Artistic  Anatomy  of  tlie  Horse." 

A  brief  description  of  the  various  Anatomical  Struc- 
tures which  may  be  distinguished  during  Life  through 
the  Skin,  By  Hugh  W.  Armstead,  M.D.,  F.R.C.S. 
With  illustrations  from  drawings  by  the  author. 
Cloth  oblong,  12^  x  10 3  75 

BACH,  "How  to  Judge  a  Horse."  A  concise  treatise 
as  to  its  Qualities  and  Soundness ;  Including  Bits  and 
Bitting,  Saddles  and  Saddling,  Stable  Drainage,  Driv- 
ing One  Horse,  a  Pair,  Four-in-hand,  or  Tandem,  etc. 
By  Captain  F.W.  Bach. 
X2mo,  cloth,  fully  illustrated. X  00 


Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  R.  Jenkins 


{**)BANJIAM,  "Anatomical  and  Physiological  Model  of 
the  Horse."  Half  life  size.  Composed  of  super- 
posed plates,  colored  to  nature,  showing  internal 
organs,  muscles,  skeleton,  etc.,  mounted  on  strong 
boards,  with  explanatory  text.  By  George  A. 
Banham,  F.R.C.V.S.    Size  of  Model  38x41  in.... 7  50 

(*•)_  <i  Tables  of  Veterinary  Posology  and  Therapeutics," 

with  weights,  measures,  etc.  By  Geo.  A.  Banham, 
F.R.C.V.S.    New  edition.     12mo,  cloth 1  00 

BAUCHEB,  "Method  of  Horsemanship."  Including 
the  Breaking  and  Training  of  Horses 1  OO 

i*)BELL,     ''The  Veterinarian's  Call  Book  (Perpetual)," 

By  Koscoe  E.  Bell,  D.V.S.,  editor  of  the  American 
Veterinary  Review.    Revised  for  1903, 

A  visiting  list,  that  can  be  commenced  at  any  time 
and  used  until  full,  c(>ntaining  much  useful  informa- 
tion for  the  student  and  the  busy  practitioner. 
Among  contents  are  items  concerning:  Veterinary 
Drugs ;  Poisons;  Solubility  of  Drugs;  Composition  of 
Milk, Bile-,  Blood,  Gastric  Juice,  Urine,  Saliva;  Respi- 
ration; Dentition;  Temperature,  etc.,  etc.  Bound  in 
flexible  leather,  with  flap  and  pocket 1  25 

BMADLEY.        **  Outlines      of     Veterinary    Anatomy." 

By  O.  Charnock  Bradley,  Member  of  the  Royal  Col- 
lege of  Veterinary  Surgeons ;  Professor  of  Anatomy 
in  the  New  Veterinary  College,  Edinburgh. 

The  author  presents  the  most  important  facts  of 
veterinary  anatomy  in  as  condensed  a  form  as  possible, 
consistent  with  lucidity.    12mo. 

Complete  in  three  parts. 

Paet  I. :      The  Limba  (cloth) 1  25 

Part  II. :     The  Trunk  (paper)  , 1  25 

Part  III. :    T?ie  Head  and  Neck  (paper) 1  25 

The  Set  complete 3  50 


851-853  Sia;th  Avenue  {cor.  i8th  St.),  New  York. 


CADIOT,  "Roarin-  in  Horses."  Its  Pathology  and 
Treatment .  This  work  represents  the  latest  develop- 
ment in  operative  methods  for  the  alleviation 
of  roaring.  Each  step. is  most  clearly  defined  by 
excellent  full-page  illustrations.  By  P.  J.  Cadiot, 
Professor  at  the  Veterinary  School,  Alfort.  Trans. 
Thos   J.  Watt  Dollar.  M.Il.C.V.S.,  etc.     Cloth 75 

—  "  Exercises  in  Equine  Siir§rery."  By  P.  J.  Cadiot. 
Translated  by  Prof.  A.  W.  Bitting,  M.D.,V.S.  ;  edited 
by  Prof.  A.  Liautard,  M.D.V.S.  8vo,  cloth,  illus- 
trated   2  50 

(•)—*' A  Treatise  on  Surgical  Therapentics  of  tlie  Domestic 
Animals."  By  P.J.  Cadiot  and  J.  Almy.  Translated 
by  Prof.  A.  Liautard,  M,D.,V.S.     2  Parts  ready. 

Part  I,  Vol.  I,  8vo,  93  pages,  45  illustrations 1  00 

Part  II,  Vol.,  I,  8vo,  96  pages 1  00 

Part  III,  Vol.,  I,  8vo,  134  pages,  33  illustrations.  .1  00 
Part  IV,  in  preparation,  to  he  ready  in  1903. 

(*)— "Clinical  Veterinary  Medicine  and  Surgery."    By  P.  J. 

Cadiot.  Translated,  edited,  and  supplemented  with 
49  new  articles  and  34  illustrations  by  Jno.  A.  W. 
Dollar,  M.R.C.V.S.     Royal  8vo,  619  pages,  94  black 

and  white  illustrations 5  25 

See  also  ''Dollar." 

{**)CHAP3IAN,  "Manual  of  the  Pathological  Treatment 
of  Lameness  in  the  Horse,"  treated  solely  by 
mechanical  means.  By  George  T.  Chapman.  8vo, 
cloth,  124  pages 2  00 

CHAUVEAU.  "Tlie  Comparative  Anatomy  of  the 
Domesticated  Animals."  By  A.  Chauveau.  New 
edition,  translated,  enlarged  and  entirely  revised  by 
Qeo.  Fleming,  F.E.C.V.S.     8vo,  cloth,  585  illus...6  25 


Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  R.  Jenkins 


CLARKE,       "Cbart   of  the   Feet   and   Teetli   of  Fossil 
Horses."    By  W.  H.  Claike 25 

CLEAVELAND.        "  Proiiounciug     Medical     Lexicon." 

Pocket  edition.    Cloth 75 

CLEMENT,  *<  Veterinary  Post  Mortem  Examina- 
tions." By  A.  W.  Clement,  V.5S.  Records  of 
autopsies,  to  be  of  any  value,  should  accurately 
represent  the  appearances  of  the  tissues  and  organs 
so  that  a  diagnosis  might  be  made  by  the  reader  were 
not  the  examiners'  conclusions  stated.  To  make  the 
pathological  conditions  clear  to  the  reader,  some 
definite  system  of  dissection  is  necessary.  The 
absence  in  the  English  language,  of  any  guide  in 
making  autopsies  upon  the  lower  animals,  induced 
Dr.  Clement  to  write  this  book,  trusting  that  it 
would  prove  of  practical  value  to  th«  profession. 
12mo,  cloth,  illustrated -^5 

(*)  COUB  TEN  A  Y,  ' '  xMauual  of  the  Practice  of  Veterinary 
Medicine."  By  Edward  Courtenay,  V.  S.  Revised  by 
Frederick  T.  G.  Hobday,  F.R.C.V.8.  Second  edition. 
Crown,  8vo,  cloth 2  75 

COX.        •'  Horses  :     In    Accident    and    Disease."       The 

sketches  introduced  embrace  various  attitudes  which 
have  been  observed,  such  as  in  choking;  the  disorders 
and  accidents  occurring  to  the  stomach  and  intestines ; 
affection  of  the  brain  ;  and  some  special  forms  of  lame- 
ness, etc.  By  J.  Roalfe  Cox,  F.R.C.V.S.  8vo,  cloth, 
fully  illustrated 1  50 

CURTIS,     "Horses,    Cattle,    Sheep    and    Swine."     The 

origin,  history,  improvement,  description.characteris- 
tics,  merits,  objections,  etc.  By  Geo.  W.  Curtis, 
M.S. A.  Superbly  illustrated.  Cloth,  $2  00;  half 
pheep,  $2,75 ;  h^lf  morocco 3  60 


8^1-853  Sixth  Avenue  {cor.  ^h  St.),  New  York. 


{*')DALBTMPLE,  "Veterinary  Obstetrics."  A  compen- 
dium for  the  use  of  advanced  students  and  Practi- 
tioners. By  W.  H.  Dalrymple,  M.  K.  C.  V.  S., 
principal  of  the  Department  of  Veterinary  Science  in 
the  Louisiana  State  University  and  A.  &  M.  College; 
Veterinarian  to  the  Louisiana  State  Bureau  of 
Agriculture,  and  Agricultural  Experiment  Stations; 
Member  of  the  United  States  Veterinary  Medical 
Associations,  etc.      8vo,  cloth,  illus 2  50 


DALZIEL,    •*  The  Fox  Terrier."    Illustrated.  (Monographs 
on  British  Dogs) .      By  Hugh  Dalziel 1  00 

—  •'  The  St.  Bernard."    Illustrated 1  00 

—  "The   Diseases   of  Dog's."      Their    Pathology,    Diagnosis 

and  Treatment,  with  a  dictionary  of  Canine  Materia 
Medica.   By  Hugh  Dalziel.  12mo,  cloth 80 

—  "Diseases  of  Horses."    12mo,  cloth 1  00 

—  "Brealiing     and     Training       Dogs."       Being      concise 

directions  for  the  proper  education  of  dogs,  both 
for  the  field  and  for  companions.  Second  edi- 
tion, revised  and  enlarged.  Part  I,  by  Pathfinder; 
Part  II,  by  Hugh  Dalziel.     12mo,  cloth,  illus.... 2  60 

—  "The   Collie."    Its   History,    Points,    and    Breeding.     By 

Hugh  Dalziel.  Illustrated,  Svo,  cloth 1  00 

—  "The  Greyhound."   Svo,  cloth,  illus 100 


DANA,    "Tables  in   Comparative  Physiology."    By   Prof. 
C.  L.  Dana,  M.D 26 


DANCE,  "Veterinary  Tablet."  Folded  in  cloth  case. 
The  tablet  of  A.  A.  Dance  is  a  synopsis  of  the  diseases 
of  horses,  cattle  and  dogs,  showing  at  a  glance  the 
causes,  symptoms  and  cures 76 


Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  ti.  Jenkins 


(*)DE  BR  UIN,     "  Bovine  Obstetrics."  By  M.  G.  De  Bruin, 

Instructor  of  Obotetrics  at  the  State  Veterinary 
School  in  Utrecht.  Translated  by  W.  E.  A.  Wyman, 
formerly  Professor  of  Veterinary  Science  at  Clemson 
A.  &  M.  College,  and  Veterinarian  to  the  South 
Carolina  Experiment  Station. 
8vo,  cloth,  382  pages,  77  illustrations 5  00 

Synopsis  of  the  Essential  Features  of  the  Work 

I.  Authorized  translation. 

i.  The  only  obstetrical  work  whicli  is  up  to  date. 

3.  Written  by  Europe's  leading  authority  on  the  subject. 

4.  Written  by  a  man  who  has  practiced  the  art  a  lifetime. 

5.  Written  by  a  man  who,  on  account  of  bis  eminence  as 
bovine  practitioner  and  teacher  of  obstetrics,  was  selected 
by  Prof.  Dr.  Frohner  and  Prof.  Dr.  Bayer  (Berlin  and 
Vienna),  to  discuss  bovine  obstetrics,  both  practically  and 
scientifically. 

0.  The  only  work  containing  a  thorough  differential  diag- 
nosis of  ante  and  post  partum  diseases. 

7.  The  only  work  doing  justice  to  modern  obstetrical 
siirgery  and  therapeutics. 

8.  Written  by  a  man  whose  practical  suggestions  revolu- 
tionized the  teaching  of  veterinary  obstetrics  even  in  the 
gi-eat  schools  of  Europe. 

9.  The  only  work  dealing  fully  with  the  now  no  longer 
obscure  contagious  and  infectious  diseases  of  calves. 

10.  Absolutely  original  and  no  compilation. 

II.  The  only  work  dealing  fully  with"  the  difficult  problem 
of  teaching  obstetrics  in  the  colleges. 

12.  The  only  work  where  the  practical  part  is  not  over- 
shadowed by  theory. 

...  A  veterinarian,  particularly  if  his  location  brings  him  in 
contact  with  obstetrical  practice,  who  makes  any  pretence  toward 
being  scientific  and  in  possession  of  modern  knowledge  upon  this 
subject,  will  not  be  without  this  excellent  work,  as  it  is  really  a  very 
valuable  treatise.  It  contains  nearly  400  pages,  numerous  illustrations, 
and  is  put  together  in  Jenkins'  best  style.  —  Pro/.  Boscoe  R.  Bell,  in  the 
American  Veterinary  Review. 

In  translating  into  English  Professor  De  Bruin's  excellent  text- 
book on  Bovine  Obstetrics,  Dr.  Wyman  has  laid  British  and  American 
veterinary  surgeons  and  students  under  a  debt  of  gratitude.  The 
work  represents  the  happy  medium  between  the  booklets  which  are 
adapted  for  cramming  purposes  by  the  student,  and  the  ponderous 
tomes  which,  although  useful  to  the  teacher,  are  not  exactly  suited 
to  the  requirements  of  the  everyday  practitioner  .  .  .  It  contains 
seventy-seven  excellent  illusti-ations  .  .  .  Both  translator  and  pu- 
blisher have  done  their  work  in  a  way  that  deserves  praise,  and  we 
can  strongly  recommend  the  work  to  veterinary  students  and  practi- 
tioners.—T/fe  Journal   of    Comparative  Pathology  and  TJierapeutics. 

This  grand  volume,  written  by  Europe's  leading  authority  on  the 
subject,  who  has  practiced  the  art  for  a  lifetime,  is  the  most  recent  and 
up-to-date  ob-^tetrical  work.  It  discusses  bovine  obstetrics,  both  prac- 
tically and  scientifically,  and  contains  thorough  difterential  diagnoses 
of  ante  and  post  mortem  diseases.  It  deals  fully  with  the  now  no 
longer  obscure  contagious  and  infectious  diseases  of  calves,  and  is  the 
only  work  of  the  kind  in  which  the  practical  part  is  not  overshadowed 
Ijy  theory.— American  AyriculturM,  Aug.,  1903. 


*See  ateo  **  TTj/wan," 


851-853  i^ixth  Avenue  (cor.  iSth  St),  New  York, 


ODOLLAB,  "Clinical  Veterinary  Medicine  and  Sur- 
gery," By  V.  J.  Cadiot.  Translated,  edited,  and 
supplemented  with  49  new  articles  and  34  illustra- 
tions by  Jno.  A.  SV.  Dollar,  M.R.C.V.S.  Eoyal  8vo, 
619  pages,  94  black  and  white  illustrations 5  25 

.  .  .  This  work,  containlner  as  It  does  the  ripe  exper- 
ience of  the  author,  who  may  be  considered  one  of  the 
foremost  surgeons  and  clinicians  of  the  day.  contains  a 
vast  amount  of  exact  scientific  information  of  the  utmost 
value  to  the  busy  workaday  practitioner,  while  for  the 
student  of  either  human  or  compa»ative  medicine,  no 
better  book  could  be  placed  in  their  hands,  that  will  give 
th«ra  a  clear  insight  into  the  many  intricate  problems 
•  wjtli  which  they  are  daily  confronted.  .  .  .—Amei'ican 
Veterinary  Beview. 

See  also  •*  Cadiot  " 


(*)—  **  Operative  Technique.  "  For  veterinary  surgeons. 
Being  the  first  volume  of  a  new  work  on  the  practice 
of  veterinary  surgery.  By  Jno.  A.  W.  Dollar, 
M.E  C.V.S.     8vo,  cloth 3.75 


(*•)—  "A  Hand-book  of  Horse-Shoeing,"  with  introductory 
chapters  on  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the 
horse's  foot.  By  Jno.  A.  W.  Dollar,  M.R.C.V.S., 
translator  and  editor  of  Moller's  "  Veterinary  Sur- 
gery," "An  Atlas  of  Veterinary  Surgical  Operations," 
etc. ;  with  the  collaboration  of  Albert  Wheatley, 
F.R.C.V.S.   8vo,  cloth,  433  pp.,  4C6  illustrations  .  .4.75 


"Roaring  in  Horses."    By  Prof .  P.  J.  Cadiot.    Translated 
by  Dr.  Dollar.     Cloth,  illustrated 75 

See  also  "  Cadiot" 


'*  Operative  Veterinary  Surgery."    By  Prof.  Dr.  H.  MoUer. 
Translated  by  Dr.  Dollar. 

8vo,  cloth,  illustrated 5  25 

See  also  "  MoUer." 


Veterinary  Catalogue  of  iViUiam  it.  Jenkins 


DUN.     ".Veterinary  Medicines,  their  Actions  and  Uses," 

By    Finlay    Dun,  V.S.,   late     lecturer     on    Materia 

Medica  and  Dietetics  at  the  Edinburgh  Veterinary 

College,   and   Examiner  in  Chemistry  to  the  Koyal 

College  of  Veterinary  Surgeons.      New  (tenth)  revised 

an<l  enlarged  English  edition.    8vo,  cloth 3  75 

The  new  volume  has  been  carefully  revised,  adapted  to 
the  official  British  Pharmacopceia,  1898,  and  brought  up  to 
date  by  Prot.  James  Macqueen,  F.R.C.V.S.,  Royal  Veterin- 
ary College,  London.  Clinical  experiments  and  therapeutic 
observations— which  form  the  basis  of  the  rational  treat- 
ment of  disease— directions  for  using  mallein,  tuberculin, 
and  Black-quartet-  vaccine,  and  all  the  more  important 
recently  introduced  medicines  have  been  added.  An  index 
of  diseases  and  remedies,  supplemented  by  a  copious  index 
of  medicines,  will  enhance  the  usefulness  of  the  book  to 
students  and  practitioners. 


DWTEB.  '« Seats  and  Saddles."  Bits  and  Bitting, 
Di  aught  and  Harness  and  the  Prevention  and  Cure  of 
Rt'Stiveness  in  Horses.  By  Francis  Dwyer.  Illus- 
trated.    1  vol.,  12mo,  cloth,  gilt 1  50 


FLEMING,  "Veterinary  Obstetrics."  Including  the 
Accidents  and  Diseases  incident  to  Pregnancy,  Parturi- 
tion, and  the  Early  Age  in  Domesticated  Animals. 
By  Geo.  Fleming,  F.R.C.V.S.     Illustrated 6  25 

—  "Operative  Veterinary  Surgery."  Part  I,  by  Dr.  Geo. 
Fleming,  M.R.C.V.S.  This  valuable  work,  one  of  the 
most  practical  treatises  yet  issued  on  the  subject  in 
the  English  language, is  devoted  to  the  common  opera- 
tions of  Veterinary  Surgery ;  and  the  concise  descrip- 
tions and  directions  of  the  text  are  illustrated  with 
numerous  wood  engravings. 
8v),  cloth 2  76 

(•)  Part  II,  containing  nearly  500  pages  and  400  illus- 
trations,  edited   and   passed  through  the    press    by 
Principal  W.  Owen  Williams,  F.R.C.V.S. 
8vo,  cloth 3  25 


8M-863  Sixth  Avenue  {cor.  iSth  St.),  New  ^orle. 


FLEMING,  **  Tuberculosis."  From  a  Sanitary  and  Patho- 
logical Poiut  of  View.  By  Geo.  Fleming,  F.R.C. 
V,S 25 

—  "The  Contagious  Diseases  of  Animals."    Their  influence  on 

the  wealth  and  health  of  nations.     12mo,  paper 25 

—  "Tlie  Comparative  Anatomy  of  the  Domesticated  Animals." 

By  A.  Chaveau.     Translated  by  Dr.   Fleming. 

8vo,  cloth,  illustrated 6  25 

See  also  '*  Chaveau." 

—  ••  Human  and  Animal  Variolae."    A  Study  in  Comparative 

Pathology,      Paper 25 

—  "Animal      Plagues."         Their      History,     Nature,     and 

Prevention.    By  George  Fleming,  F.  R.  C.  V.  S.,  etc. 

First  Series.    8vo,  cloth 6  00 

Second  Series.    8vo,  cloth 3  00 

—  "  Roaring     in     Horses."         By    Dr.     George      Fleming, 

F.R.C.V.S.  A  treatise  on  this  peculiar  disorder 
of  the  Horse,  indicating  its  method  of  treatment 
and  curability.    8vo,  cloth,  with  col.  plates 1  50 


FLEMING- NEUMANN,  "Parasites  and  Parasitic 
Diseases  of  the  Domesticated  Animals."  A  work 
to  which  the  students  of  human  or  veterinary  medi- 
cine, the  sanitarian,  agriculturist  or  breeder  or  rearer 
of  animals,  may  refer  for  full  information  regarding 
the  external  and  internal  Parasites— vegetable  and 
animal — which  attack  various  species  of  Domestic 
Animals.  A  Treatise  by  L.  G.  Neumann,  Professor 
at  the  National  Veterinary  School  of  Toulouse. 
Translated  and  edited  by  George  Fleming,  C.  B.,  L.L. 
P.,F.R.C.V,S.   873  pages,  365  illustraUons,  cloth.7  60 


iO  Veterinary  (Catalogue  of  William  tt.  Jenkins 


QUESSWELL,     '*  Diseases  and  Disorders  of  the  Horse." 

By  Albert,  James  B.  and  George  Gresswell. 

Crown,  8vo,  illustrated,  cloth 1  76 

—  Manual  of  "Tlie  Tlieory  and  Practice  of  Equine  Medicine," 

By  James  B.  Gresswell,  F.R.C.V.S.,  and  Albert 
Gresswell,  M.R.C.V.S.,  second  edition,  enlarged, 
8vo,  cloth 2  75 

—  "  Veterinary      Pliarmacologry     and      Tlierapeutics."     By 

James  B.  Gresswell,  F.R.C.V.S.     16mo,  cloth  . .  .1  50 

—  •*  Tlie    Bovine    Prescriber."     For    the    use   of    Veterina- 

rians and  Veterinary  Students.  By  James  B.  and 
Albert  Gresswell,  M.R.C.V.S    Cloth 75 

—  "Tlie  Equine  Hospital  Prescriber."    For  the  use  of  Veter- 

inary Practitioners  and  Students.  By  Drs.  James 
B.  and  Albert  Gresswell,  M.R.C.V.S.     Cloth 75 

—  "Veterinary    Pharmacopeia,      Materia      Medica      and 

Therapeutics . "      By  George  and  Charles  Gresswell, 
with  descriptions  and  physiological  actions  of  medi- 
cines.   By  Albert  Gresswell. 
Crown,  8vo,  cloth 2  75 


GOTTUEIL.       "A    Manual    of    General     Histology." 

By  Wm.  S.  Gottheil,  M.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology  in 
the  American  Veterinary  College,  New  York;  etc.,  etc. 
Histology  is  the  basis  of  the  physician's  art,  as 
Anatomy  is  the  foundation  of  the  surgeon's  science. 
Only  by  knowing  the  processes  of  life  can  we  under- 
stand the  changes  of  disease  and  the  action  of 
remedies;  as  the  architect  must  know  his  building 
materials,  so  must  the  practitioner  of  medicine  know 
the  intimate  structure  of  the  body.  To  present  this 
knowledge  in  an  accessible  and  simple  form  has 
been  the  author's  task. 
8vo.,  clolh,  U8  pages,  fully  illustrated  .  = 1  00 


851-863  Sixth  Avenue  {cor.  iSth  St.),  New  York.  11 


HASSLOCH.  "  A  Compend  of  Yeterinary  Materia  Medica 
and  Therapeutics."  By  Dr.  A.  C.  Hasslocli,  V.S., 
Lecturer  on  Materia  Medica  and  Therapeutics,  and 
Professor  of  Veterinary  Dentistry  at  the  New  York 
College  of  Veterinary  Surgeons  and  School  of  Compa- 
rative Medicine,  N.  Y.     12nio,  cloth,  225  pages  .  .1  50 

HEATLEY.  "  Tlie  Stock  Owner's  Guide."  A  handy  Medi- 
cal Treatise  for  every  man  who  owns  an  ox  or  cow. 
By  George  S.  Heatley,  M.R.C.V.     12mo,  cloth..  .1  25 

—  "The   Horse   Owner's   Safeguard."       A    handy   Medical 

Guide  for  every  Horse  Owner.     12mo,  cloth  1  50 

—  "Practical  Veterinary  Remedies."  12mo,  cloth 1  00 


HILI^.    "The   Management    and    Diseases    of    the    Bog." 

Containing  full  instructions  for  Breeding,  Rearing  and 
Kenneling  Dogs.  Their  Different  Diseases.  How  to 
detect  and  how  to  cure  them.  Their  Medicines,  and 
the  doses  in  which  they  can  be  safely  administered. 
By  J.  Woodroffe  Hill,  F.R.C.V.S.  12mo,  cloth,  extra 
fully  illustrated 2  00 

(*)HI2jL,    "  The   Diseases   of  the    Cat."    By  J.  Woodroffe 

Hill,  F.R.C. V.S.     12mo,  cloth,  illustrated 1  25 

Written  from  the  experience  of  many  years'  prac- 
tice and  close  pathological  research  into  the  maladies 
to  which  our  domesticated  feline  friends  are  liable — a 
subject  which  it  must  be  admitted  has  not  found  not 
prominence  in  veterinary  literature  to  which  it  is 
undoubtedly  entitled. 


HINEBAUCH,    "Veterinary  Dental  Surgery."     For  the 

use  of  Students,  Practitioners  and  Stockmen. 

12mo,  cloth,  illustrated 2  00 

Sheep , a  76 


12  Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  tt.  Jenkins 


no  ARE.  "A  Manual  of  Veterinary  Therapeutics  and 
Pharmacology."  By  E.  Wallis  Hoare,  F.R.C.V.S. 
12mo,  cloth,  560  pages 2  75 

"Deserves  a  good  place  in  the  libraries  of  all  veterina- 
rians. *  *  *  Cannot  help  but  be  of  the  greatest  assist- 
ance to  the  young  veterinarian  and  the  every  day  busy 
practitioner."— ^w^'ican  Vetei'inary  Review. 


{*)HOBDAY,  "  Canine  and  Feline  Surgery."  By  Frederick 
T.  G.  Hobday,  F.R.C.V.S.,  Professor  in  Charge  of  the 
Free  Out-Patients'  Clinique  at  the  Royal  Veterinary 
College,  London,  The  work  contains  76  illustrations 
in  the  text.     Demy  8vo,  152  pp.,  full-bound  cloth  .2  00 


{*') HUNTING.  The  Art  of  Horse-shoeing.  A  manual 
for  Farriers.  By  William  Hunting,  F.R.C.V.S.,  ex- 
president  of  the  Royal  College  of  Veterinary  Sur- 
geons. One  of  the  most  up-to-date,  concise  books  of 
its  kind  in  the  English  language.  8vo,  cloth,  with 
nearly  100  illustrations 1  00 


{**)JENKINS,    "  Model  of  the  Horse." 7  50 

See  also  *'  Banham.'' 


{") ROBERT,     "Practical  Toxicology  for  Physicians  and 

Students,"  By  Professor  Dr.  Rudolph  Robert, 
Medical  Director  of  Dr.  Brehmer's  Sanitarium  for 
Pulmonary  Diseases  at  Goerbersderf  in  Silesia  (Prus- 
sia), late  Director  of  the  Pharmacological  Institute, 
Dorpat,  Russia.  Translated  and  edited  by  L.  H. 
Friedburg,  Ph.D.  Authorized  Edition.  8vo,  cloth.2  50 


KOCH,     "lltiology  of  Tuberculosis."     By  Dr.  R.  Koch. 
Translated  by  T.  Saure.    8vo,  cloth 1  00 


851-853  Sixth  Avenue  {cor.  mh  St.),  New  York.  13 


KEATING,  "A  New  Unabridged  Pronoimrin^  Diction- 
ary of  Medicine."  By  John  M.  Keating,  M.D.,  LL.D., 
Henry  Hamilton  and  others.  A  voluminous  and 
exhaustive  hand-book  of  Medical  and  scientific 
terminology  with  Phonetic  Pronunciation,  Accentu- 
ation, Etymology,  etc.  With  an  appendix  containing 
important  tables  of  Bacilli,  Microcci  Leucomaines, 
Ptomaines ;  Drugs  and  Materials  used  in  Antiseptic 
Surgery ;  Poisons  and  their  antidotes ;  Weights  and 
Measures ;  Themometer  Scales ;  New  Officinal  and 
Unofficinal  Drugs,  etc.,  etc.    Svo,  818  pages 5  00 


LAMBBBT.       "The      Uerm     Theory       of      Disease." 

Bearing  upon  the  health  and  welfare  of  man  and  the 
domesticated  animals.  By  James  Lambert,  F.R.C.V.S. 
8vo.  paper 25 


LAW,  "Farmers'  Veterinary  Adyiser."  A  Guide  to  the 
Prevention  and  Treatment  of  Disease  in  Domestic 
Animals.  By  Prof.  James  Law.  Illus.,  8vo,  cloth. 8  00 


{**)LEGGE.  "Cattle  Tuberculosis."  A  Practical  Guide 
to  the  Farmer,  Butcher  and  Meat  Inspector.  By  T.M, 
Legge,  M.A.,  M.D.,  D.P.H.,  Secretary  of  the  Royal 
Commission  on  Tuberculosis,  1896-98;  autlior  of 
"  Public  Health  in  European  Capitals,"  and  "  Harold 
Sessions,  F.R.C.V.S."    Cloth 1  00 


OLIAUTABD,  "A  Treatise  on  Surgical  Therapeutics 
of  the  Domestic  Animals."  By  Prof.  Dr.  P.  J .  Cadiot 
and  J.  Almy.     Translated  bj'  Prof.  Liautard. 

Parti,      Volume  1 1  00 

Part  II,  *'       1  00 

Part  III,  "       ICO 

(Part  IV  in  preparation.) 
See  also  *'  Cadiot," 


14  Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  R.  Jenkins 


LIAUTARD,    "Median  Neurotomy  in  the  Treatment  of 
Chronic  Tendinitis  and  Periostosis  of  the  Fetlock." 

By  C.  Pellerin,  late  Repetitor  of  Clinic  and  Surgery  to 
Llie  Alfort  Veterinary  School.  Translated  with  addi- 
tional facts  relating  to  it,  by  Prof.  A.  Liautard,  M.D., 
V.M. 

Having  rendered  good  results  when  performed  by 
himself,  the  author  believes  the  operation,  which 
consists  in  dividing  the  cubito-plantar  nerve  and  in 
excising  a  portion  of  the  peripherical  end,  the  means 
of  improving  the  conditions,  and  consequently  the 
values  of  many  apparently  doomed  animals.  Agricul- 
ture in  particular  will  be  benefited. 

The  work  is  divided  into  two  parts.  The  first  covers 
the  study  of  Median  Neurotomy  itself ;  the  second, 
the  exact  relations  of  the  facts  as  observed  by  the 
author.     8vo. ,  boards 1  00 

—  "Manual   of  Operative    Veterinary   Surgery"      By   A. 

Liautard,  M.D.,  V.M.,  Principal  and  Professor 
of  Anatomy,  Surgery,  Sanitary  Medicine  and  Juris- 
prudence in  the  American  Veterinary  College; 
Chevalier  du  Merite  Agricole  de  France,  Honorary 
Fellow  of  the  Royal  College  of  Veterinary  Surgeons 
(London),  etc.,  etc.  8vo,  cloth,  786  pages  and  nearly 
600  illustrations 6  00 

(*)  — "Animal   Castration."    A  concise  and  practical  Treatise 

on  the  Castration  of   the  Domestic  Animals.      The 

only  work  on  the  subject  in  the  English    language. 

Illustrated  with  52  cuts,  having  a  fine  portrait  of  the 

author.     A  new  revised  and  enlarged  edition,  1902. 

12mo,  cloth 2  00 

.  .  .  The  most  complete  and  comprehensive  work  on  the 
subject  in  English  veterinary  litei-ature.— ^mcz-^ican.  Agri- 
cuUurisU  July  19th,  1903. 

—  **  Exercises  in  Equine  Surgery,"    By  Prof.  Dr.  P.  J.  Cadiot. 

Translated  by  Prof.  Bitting  and  edited  by  Dr.  Liau- 
tard.   8vo,  cloth,  illustrated 2  50 

See  alsQ  *'  (Jadiot." 


851-853  Sixth  Avenue  {cor.  48f/i  St.),  New  York.  15 


LIAUTABD,     "On  the  Lameness  of  Horses."     By   A. 

Liautard,  M.D.,V.S .  .2  6U 

—  "  How  to  Tell   the   Age   of  the  Domestic  Animal."    By 

Dr.  A.  Liautard,    M.D.,  V.S.      Profusely  illustrated. 
12mo,  cloth 50 

—  "Vade  Mecum   of  Equine   Anatomy."     By  A.  Liautard, 

M.D.V.S.     Dean  of  the  American  Veterinary  College, 
12rno.  cloth.     New  edition,  with  illustrations 2  00 

—  "  Translation  of  Zundel  on  the  Horse's  Foot."  Cloth.. 2  00 


LONG,    "Book    of    the    Pig."      Its    selection,    Breeding, 
Feeding  and  Management.    8vo,  cloth 4  26 


{**)LOWE.  ^'Breeding  Racehorses  by  the  Figure 
System."  Compiled  by  the  late  C.  Bruce  Lowe. 
Edited  by  William  Allison,  "  The  Special  Commis- 
sioner," London  Sportsman,  Hon.  Secretary  Sporting 
League,  and  Manager  of  the  International  Horse 
Agency  and  Exchange.  With  numerous  fine  illustra- 
tions of  celebi-ated  horses.     Quarto,  cloth 7  50 

{*)LUDLOW,  "Science  in  the  Stable";  or  How  a  Horse 
can  be  Kept  in  Perfect  Health  and  be  Used  Without 
Shoes,  in  Harness  or  under  the  Saddle.  With  the 
Reason  Why.  Second  American  Edition.  Enlarged 
and  Exemplified.  By  Jacob  R.  Ludlow,  M.D.  Late 
Staff  Surgeon,  U.  S,  Army.     Paper,  166  pages 50 

LUPTON,  "Horses:  Sound  and  Unsound,"  with 
Law  relating  to  Sales  and  Warranty.  By  J.  Irvine 
Lupton,  F.  R.  C.  V.S .     8vo,  cloth,  illustrated 1  25 

—  **  The  Horse."  As  he  Was,  as  he  Is,  and  as  he  Ought  to  Be. 
By  J.  I.  Lupton,  F.R,C.V,S.    Illus.,  Crown,  8vo.  .1  40 


16  Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  R.  Jenkins 


MAGNER.  "  Facts  for  Horse  Owners."  By  D.  Magner. 
Upwards  of  1,000  pages,  illustrated  with  900  engrav- 
ings.    8vo,  leather  binding 7  &^ 


MAYHEW,        "The    Illustrated    Horse    Doctor."      An 

accurate  and  detailed  account  of  the  Various  Diseases 
to  which  the  Equine  Race  is  subject ;  together  with  the 
latest  mode  of  Treatment,  and  all  the  Requisite  Pre- 
scriptions written  in  plain  English.  By  E.  Edward 
Mayhew,  M.R.C.V.S.  Illustrated. 
8vo,  cloth. • 2  75 


McBRIDE.        "Anatomical    Outlines    of    the     Horse." 

12mo,  cloth.     Reduced  to 1  50 


BIcCOMBIE.  "Cattle  and  Cattle  Breeders."  Cloth 1  00 

nM*FADYEAN.  "Anatomy  of  the  Horse."  Second 
edition  completely  revised.  A  Dissection  Guide. 
By  John  M'Fadyean,  M.B.,  B.Sc,  F.R.S.E.,  Principal 
of  the  Royal  Veterinary  College,  London. 

8vo,  cloth ^^® 

This  book  is  intended  for  Veterinary  students,  and 
offers  to  them  in  its  48  full-page  colored  plates 
54  illustrations  and  excellent  text,  the  most  valuable 
and  practical  aid  in  the  study  of  Veterinary  Anatomy, 
especially  in  the  dissecting  room. 

-  "  Comparative  Anatomy  of  the   Domesticated  Animals." 

By  J.  M'Fadyean.    Profusely  illustrated,  and  to  be 
issued  in  two  parts. 

Part  I-Osteology,  ready.     Paper,  2.50;  cloth . . .  .2.75 
(Part  II  in  preparation.) 


851-853  Sixth  Avenue  (cor.  iSth  St.),  New  York.  17 


MILLS,    *'How  to     Keep     a     Dog     in     the     City.'^     By 

Wesley  Mills,  M.D.,  V.S.  It  tells  how  to  choose, 
manage,  house,  feed,  educate  the  pup,  how  to  keep  him 
clean  and  teach  him  cleanliness.     Paper 25 


MOLLEB,  "Operative  Veterinary  Snrgery."  By  Profes- 
sor Dr.  H.  Moller,  Berlin.  Translated  and  edited 
from  the  2nd  edition,  enlarged  and  improved,  by 
John    A.  W.  Dollar.  M.K.C.S. 

Prof.  MoUer's  work  presents  the  most  recent  and 
complete  exposition  of  the  Principles  and  Practice  of 
Veterinary  Surgery,  and  is  the  standard  text-hook  on  the 
subject  throughout  Germany. 

Many  subjects  ignored  in  previous  treatises  on 
Veterinary  Surgery  here  receive  full  consideration, 
while  the  better  known  are  presented  under  new  and 
suggestive  aspects. 

As  Prof.  Moller's  work  represents  not  only  his 
own  opinions  and  practice,  but  those  of  the  best 
Veterinary  Surgeons  of  various  countries,  the  trans- 
lation cannot  fail  to  be  of  signal  service  to  American 
and  British  Veterinarians  and  to  Students  of  Veter- 
inary and  Comparative  Surgery. 
1  vol.,  Bvo.     722  pages,  142  illustrations 5  25 


MOBETON,    '' On  Horse-brekking."    i2rao,  cloth 


50 


MOSSELMAN-LIEXAUX.  ''  Veterinary  Microbio- 
logy." By  Professors  Mosselman  and  Lienaux, 
Nat.  Veterinary  College,  Cureghem,  Belgium.  Trans 
lated  and  edited  by  K.  K.  Dinwiddle,  Professor  of 
Veterinary  Science,  College  of  Agriculture,  Arkansas 
State  University.    12mo,  cloth,  342  pages 2  00 


18  Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  R.  Jenkins 


NO  CARD,  •'  The  Animal  Tuberculoses,  and  their  Relation 
to  Human  Tuberculosis."  By  Ed.  Nocard,  Prof,  of  the 
Alfort  Veterinary  College.  Translated  by  H.  Scurfield, 
M.D.  Ed.,  Ph.  Camb.  ]2mo,  cloth,  143  pages. . .  .1  00 
Perhaps  the  chief  interest  to  doctors  of  human 
medicine  in  Professor  Nocard's  book  lies  in  the 
demonstration  of  the  small  part  played  by  heredity, 
and  the  great  part  played  by  contagion  in  the  propa- 
gation of  bovine  tuberculosis.  It  seems  not  unreason- 
able to  suppose  that  the  same  is  the  case  for  human 
tuberculosis,  and  that,  if  the  children  of  tuberculosis 
parents  were  protected  from  infection  by  cohabitation 
or  ingestion,  the  importance  of  heredity  as  a  cau«e  of 
the  disease,  or  even  of  the  predisposition  to  it,  would 
dwindle  away  into  insignificance. 


PEGLEB.  "The  Book  of  the  Goat/'  12mo,  cloth 1  75 


PELJLEBIN.      "Median  Neurotomy    in    the  Treatment 
of  Chronic  Tendinitis  and  Periostosis  of  the  Fetlock." 

By  C.  Pellerin,  late  repetitor  of  Clinic  and  Surgery  to 
the  Alfort  Veterinary  School.  Translated,  with  Addi- 
tional Facts  Relating  to  It,  by  Prof.  A.  Liautard,  M.D., 
V.M.    8vo,  boards,  illustrated 100 

See  also  "  Liautard." 


PETERS.  "  A  Tuberculous  Herd— Test  Tfith  Tuber- 
culin." By  Austin  Peters,  M.  R.  C.  V.  S.,  Chief 
Inspector  of  Cattle  for  the  New  York  State  Board  of 
Health  during  the  winter  of  1892-93.     Pamphlet. ...  25 


REYNOLD,     "Breeding  and  Management    of    Draught 
Horses,"    8vo,  cloth 1  40 


851-853  Sixth  Avenue  {cor.  iWi  St.),  New  York.  19 


ROBEBGE,  *<  The  Foot  of  the  Horse,"  or  Lameness 
and  all  Diseases  of  the  Feet  traced  to  an  Unbalanced 
Foot  Bone,  prevented  or  cured  by  balancing  the  foot. 
By  David  Koberge.    Svo,  cloth 5  00 


SEWELL.  "The  Examination  of  Horses  as  to  Sound- 
ness and  Selection  as  to  Purchase."  By  Edward 
SeweU,  M.R.C.V.S.     Svo,  paper 1  50 

It  is  a  great  advantage  to  the  business  man  to 

know  something  of  the  elements  of  law,  and  nobody 
ought  either  to  buy  or  own  a  horse  who  does  not  know 
something  about  the  animal.    That  something  this  book 

gives,  and  gives  in  a  thoroughly  excellent  way 

—  Our  Animal  Friends. 


SMITH.     **A   Manual   of  Yeterinary    Physiology."     By 

Veterinary  Captain  F.  Smith,  M.R.C.V.S.     Author  of 
"  A  Manual  of  Veterinary  Hygiene." 

Throughout  this  manual  the  object  has  been  to  con- 
dense the  information  as  much  as  possible.  The 
broad  facts  of  the  sciences  are  stated  so  as  to  render 
them  of  use  to  the  student  and  practitioner.  In  this 
second  edition — rewritten — the  whole  of  the  Nervous 
System  has  been  revised,  a  new  chapter  dealing  with 
the  Development  of  the  Ovum  has  been  added  together 
with  many  additional  facts  and  illustrations.  About 
one  hundred  additional  pages  are  given.  Second 
edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  with  additional  illus- 
trations   3  75 

—  "Manual  of  Veterinary  Hygiene."    2nd  edition,  revised. 
Crown,  8vo,  cloth 3  25 


{**)STIiANGEWAT,  "Veterinary  Anatomy."  Edited  by 
I.  Vaughan,  F.L.S.,  M.R.C.V.S.  New  edition  revised, 
with  several  hundred  illustrations.  Svo,  cloth 5  00 


SiO  Veterinary  Catalogiie  of  William  R.  Jenkins 


SUSSDORF.      "Large   Colored   Wall   Diagrams."      By 

Prof.  Sussdorf,  M.D.  (of  Gottingen).  Text  translated 
by  Prof.  W.  Owen  Williams,  of  the  New  Veterinary 
College,  Edinburgh.     Size,  44  inches  by  30  inches. 

1.— Horse.  4.— Ox. 

2.— Mare.  5.— Boar  and  Sow. 

3.-C0W.  6.— Dog  and  Bitch. 

Showing  the  position  of  the  viscera  in  the  large 
cavities  of  the  body. 

Price,  unmounted 1  75  each 

'«      mounted  on  linen,  with  roller 3  50     ** 


{*)THOMPSON,  ** Elementary  Lectures  on  Yeterinary 
Science."  For  agricultural  students,  farmers  and 
stock  keepers.  By  Henry  Thompson,  M.R.C.V.S., 
lecturer  on  Veterinary  Science  at  the  Aspatria  Agri- 
cultural College,  England. 

8vo,  cloth,  397  pages,  51  illustrations 3  75 

It  is  complete  yet  concise  and  just  the  up-to-date 
book  for  a  beginner. 


VAN  MATER.  "A  Text  Book  of  Veterinary  Oph- 
thalmology." By  George  G.  Van  Mater,  M.D., 
D.V.S.,  Professor  of  Ophthalmology  in  the  American 
Veterinary  College ;  Oculist  and  Aurist  to  St.  Martha's 
Sanitarium  and  Dispensary ;  Consulting  Eye  and  Ear 
Surgeon  to  the  Twenty-sixth  Ward  Dispensary ;  Eye 
and  Ear  Surgeon,  Brooklyn  Eastern  District  Dispen- 
sary, etc.  Illustrated  by  one  chromo  lithograph  plate 
and  seventy-one  engravings. 
8vo  cloth 3  GO 

.  .  .  We  intend  to  adopt  this  valuable  work  as  a  text 
book.— i;.  J.  Creelij,  D.V.S.,  Dean  of  the  San  Francisco 
Veterinary  CoUege.    May  16th,  19Ct>. 


851-853  Sixth  Avenue  {cor.  mh'^^St.),  New  York  21 


VETEBINABY      DIAGRAMS      in     Tabular      Form. 
Size,  28^  in.  x  22  inches.     Price  per  set  of  five. . .  4  75 

No.  1.  "The  External  Form  and  Elementary  Ana- 
tomy of  the  Horse."  Eight  colored  illustrations — 
1.  External  regions ;  2.  Skeleton  ;  3.  Muscles  (Superior 
Layer) ;  4.  Muscles  (Deep  Layer) ;  5.  Respiratory  Ap- 
paratus; 6.  Digestive  Apparatus  ;  7.  Circulatory  Ap- 
paratus ;  8.  Nerve  Apparatus  ;  with  letter-press  descrip- 
tion   1  25 

No.  2.  "The  Age  of  Domestic  Animals."  Forty-two 
figures  illustrating  the  structure  of  the  teeth,  indicat- 
ing the  Age  of  the  Horse,  Ox,  Sheep,  and  Dog,  with 
full  description 75 

No.  3.    "  The  Unsoundness  and  Defects  of  the  Horse." 

Fifty  figures  illustrating— 1.  The  Defects  of  Confor- 
mation ;  2.  Defects  of  Position ;  3.  Infirmities  or  Signs 
of  Disease ;  4.  Unsoundnesses ;  5.  Defects  of  the  Foot ; 
with  full  description 75 

No.  4.     "The  Shoeing  of  the  Horse,  Mule  and  Ox." 

Fifty  figures  descriptive  of  the  Anatomy  and  Physio- 
logy of  the  Foot  and  of  Horse-shoeing 75 

No.  5.  "The  Elementary  Anatomy,  Points,  and  But- 
cher's Joints  of  the  Ox."  Ten  colored  illustrations 
—  1.  Skeleton;  2.  Nervous  System;  3.  Digestive 
System  (Right  Side) ;  4.  Respiratory  System  ;  5.  Points 
of  a  Fat  Ox  ;  6.  Muscular  System ;  7.  Vascular  System ; 
8.  Digestive  System  (Left  Side) ;  9.  Butcher's  Sections 
of  a  Calf ;  10.  Butcher's  Sections  of  an  Ox ;  with  full 
description . .  1  25 


WALLET,    "Four  Boyine  Scourges."    (Pleuro-Pneumonia, 
Foot     and    Mouth      Disease,     Cattle    Plague    and 
Tubercle.)     With  an    Appendix    on    the  Inspection 
of  Live  Animals  and  Meat. 
Illustrated,  4to,  cloth 6  40 


22  Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  R.  Jenkins 


(*)  WALLET,    "A  Practical  Guide  to  Meat  Inspection."  By 

Thomas  Walley,  M.R.C.V.S.,  formerly  principal  of 
the  Edinburgh  Royal  (Dick)  Veterinary  College ;  Pro- 
fessor of  Veterinary  Medicine  and  Surgery,  etc. 
Fourth  Edition,  thoroughly  revised  and  enlarged 
by  Stewart  Stockman,  M.E.C.V.S.,  Professor  of 
Pathology,  Lecturer  on  Hygiene  and  Meat  Inspection 
at  Dick  Veterinary  College,  Edinburgh. 
12mo,  cloth,  with  45  colored  illus.,  295  pages 3  00 

An  experience  of  over  30  years  in  his  profession 
and  a  long  oflBcial  connection  (some  sixteen  years) 
with  Edinburgh  Abattoirs  have  enabled  the  author  to 
gather  a  large  store  of  information  on  the  subject, 
which  he  has  embodied  in  his  book.  Dr.  Walley's  opi- 
nions are  regarded  as  the  highest  authority  on  Meat 
Inspection. 

This  fourth  is  an  entirely  re-written  and  enlarged 
edition,  and  while  Dr.  Stockman  is  indeed  indebted 
to  the  old  for  much  useful  information,  tJiis  up-to- 
date  work  will  hardly  be  recognized  as  the  old 
"  Walley's  Meat  Inspection."  It  will  be  found  the 
most  valuable  work  on  the  subject  in  the  English 
language,  has  many  illustrations,  many  of  which  are 
colored,  and  a  complete  index. 


WILLIAMS,     "Principles   and   Practice   of   Veterinary 
Medicine."     Author's    edition,    entirely  revised  and 
illustrated  with  numerous   plain  and  colored  plates. 
By  W.  Williams,  M.R.C.V.S. 
8vo. ,  cloth 6  00 


—  "  Principles    and    Practice    of    Veterinary     Surgery," 

Author's  edition,    entirely    revised   and    illustrated 
with   numerous   plain    and    colored  plates.    By  W. 
Williams,  M.R.C.V.S. 
8vo,  eloth 6  00 


851-853  Sixth  Avenue  {cor.  4.8th  St.),  New  York  ■  23 


THE  MOST  COMPLETE,  PROGRESSIVE  AND 
SCIENTIFIC  BOOK  ON  THE  SUBJECT  IN 
THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE 

(*)  WINSL O  W,    ^'Veterinary  Materia  Medica  and  Tlierapen- 
tics."    By  Kenelm  Winslow,  B.A.S.,  M.D.V.,  M.D., 

(Harv.) ;  formerly  Assistant  Professor  of  Therapeutics 
in  the  Veterinary  School  of  Harvard  University; 
Fellow  of  the  Massachusetts  Medical  Society  ;  Surgeon 
to  the  Newton  Hospital,  etc. 

Second  Edition  Revised. 

8vo,  cloth,  750  pages 6  00 

Your  letter  received  and  I  am  pleased  to  know  that  we  are  to 
have  an  American  Materia  Medica.— J".  H.  Wattles,  St.,  M.D.,  D.V.S., 
The  Western  Veterinary  College,  Kansas  City,  Mo. 

.  .  .  Am  delighted  with  it.  It  is  remarkably  correct,  complete 
and  up  to  date  and  is  bound  to  supersede  any  other  work  on  the 
same  subject  heretofore  before  the  {profession. 

No  practitioner's  library  is  complete  without  it  and  it  will  be 
indispensable  tor  students,  as  it  does  away  with  the  necessity  of  their 
having  a  number  of  collateral  books'  on  the  subject. 

It  will  be  adopted  as  the  text  booklin  the  Chicago  Veterinary 
College.  —  Dr.  E.  L.  Qidtman,  Chicago  Veterinary  College. 

.  .  .  The  book  is  of  admirable  merit  and  full  of  valuable  informa- 
tion from  beginning  to  end,  very  explicit,  rich  and  interesting,  and 
should  be  in  the  hands  of  every  student  as  well  as^practitioner  of  the 
art  of  Veterinary  Medicine.  —  r^Mrsto?i  Miller,  M.D.,  Professor  of 
Materia  Medica,  Therapeutics  and  Chemistry,  San  Francisco  Veteri- 
nary College. 

...  I  have  found^  tlie  book  very  satisfactory  as  a  reference 
book  to  be  used  in  connection  with  lectures.  \  .—Dr.  W.A.  Landacre, 
College  of  Pharmacy,  Ohio  State  University. 

I  consider  it  the  only  work  on  materia  medica  and  therapeutics 
suitable  to  the  American  veterinary  practitioner.  It  deserves  a  wide 
distribution  among  veterinarians.  Ij  have  recommended  it  to  my 
Students.— cro7i7i  J.  Repp,  V.M.D.,  Iowa  State  College,  Ames,  Iowa. 


24  Veterinary  Catalogue  of  William  R.  Jenkins. 


i**)WYMAN,  "The  Clinical  Diagnosis  of  Lameness 
in  the  Horse."  F-y  W.  E.  A.  Wyman,  V.S.,  formerly 
Professor  of  Veterinary  Science,  Clemson  A.  &  M. 
College,  and  Veterinarian  to  the  South  Carolina 
Experiment  Station.     8vo,  cloth,  illustrated.  ...  .2  50 

(*)—  "Bovine  Obstetrics."  By  M.  G.  De  Bruin,  Instructor 
of  Obstetrics  at  the  State  Veterinary  School  in 
Utrecht.  Translated  by  W.  E.  A.  Wyman,  M.D.V., 
V.S.,  formerly  Professor  of  Veterinary  Science, 
Clemson  A.  &  M.  College,  and  Veterinarian  to  the 
South  Carolina  Experiment  Station. 

8vo,  cloth,  382  pages,  77  illustrations 5  00 

See  also  '' De  Bruin." 

(*)—  "  Tibio-peroneal   Neurectomy  for  the  Relief  of  Spavin 

Lameness."    By  W.  E.  A.  Wyman,  M.D.V.,  V.S. 

8vo,  boards,  30  pages 50 

Anyone  wanting  to  perform  tliis  operation  should  procure 
this  little  treatise ;  he  will  find  it  of  considerable  help. — The 
Veterinary  Journal,  Sept.,  1903. 

ZUNDEL,      "The    Horse's   Foot   and   Its   Diseases."    By 

A.  Zundel,  Principal  Veterinarian  of  Alsace  Lorraine. 
Translated  by  Dr.  A.  Liautard,  V.S.  12mo,  cloth 
illustrated 2  00 

ZUILL,  "Typhoid  Fever;  or  Contagious  Influenza 
in  the  Horse."  By  Prof.  W.  L.  Zuill,  M.D.,D.V.S. 
Pamphlet 25 


Our  Books  (ire  for  sale  by   all  booksellers, 
or  will  be  sent  prepaid  for  the  i)vices  here  quoted^ 


WILLIAn  R.  JENKINS, 

851  and  853  Sixth  Avenue,  NEW  YORK 


^flbbsler  Family  Library  cf  Veterfnaiy  Medlcte 

Cummings  School  of  Veterinary  Medicine  <£ 

Tufts  University 

200  Westt)oro  Road 

North  Grafton.  MA  0153a 


